Operation Manual m EN
Table of Contents Table of Contents About the Relevant Manuals 23 About the Relevant Manuals.. ................................................................... 23 Component Structure 24 Control surface.. ..................................................................................... 24 Digital mixing console.............................................................................. 33 About RIVAGE PM Editor.. .........................................................................
Table of Contents Precautions regarding using the NETWORK connector.................................. 76 Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) 78 Selected Channel section.......................................................................... 78 DYNAMICS.. ............................................................................................ 79 GAIN...................................................................................................... 80 EQUALIZER...................................
Table of Contents Library screen (Delete)........................................................................... 134 Pair setting........................................................................................... 135 Setting or defeating pairing on the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.. .......... 138 Screen Overview 140 About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen............................................... 140 About the OVERVIEW screen..............................................................
Table of Contents Connecting to a Dante network................................................................ 209 DSP mirroring function in the Dante audio network.................................... 210 Word clock in the RIVAGE PM series.. ........................................................ 211 About the sampling rate converter (SRC).. ................................................ 212 About connecting a computer..................................................................
Table of Contents Assign the channels that will be used by the DSP engines to the TWINLANe network.. ............................................................................................. 254 DSP popup window................................................................................ 255 TWINLANe CONFIGURATION popup window............................................... 257 SYSTEM CONFIG [CS1] popup window.......................................................
Table of Contents HY SLOT window.. ................................................................................. 300 DANTE SETUP popup window.. ................................................................ 302 Dante messages..................................................................................... 305 Mounting an I/O rack.............................................................................. 310 DEVICE SELECT popup window.. ..........................................................
Table of Contents PHONES popup window.......................................................................... 351 Patching 352 Input channel I/O unit section.................................................................. 352 Input channel mixing engine section.. ...................................................... 354 Patching the input ports......................................................................... 359 Display when patching conflicts between engines................................
Table of Contents Inserting a plug-in into monitor signals.. .................................................. 401 MONITOR SETTINGS popup window (insert).. ............................................ 402 MONITOR INSERT popup window.. ........................................................... 403 INSERT MOUNT screen............................................................................ 404 About cue.. ...........................................................................................
Table of Contents Using a popup window dedicated to the RTA.............................................. 450 MONITOR screen (RTA).. ......................................................................... 451 RTA popup window................................................................................ 452 Using the HPF/EQ popup window for the channel parameters...................... 454 Using the GEQ popup window for the inserted GEQ.....................................
Table of Contents About dynamics..................................................................................... 490 DYNAMICS section.................................................................................. 491 Controlling a dynamics processor via the Selected Channel section.. ............ 492 Controlling a dynamics processor via the OVERVIEW screen......................... 493 Dynamics fields.....................................................................................
Table of Contents DELAY SCALE popup window.. ................................................................. 529 DELAY TIME popup window.. ................................................................... 530 Using SENDS TO..................................................................................... 531 Using SENDS FROM.. .............................................................................. 533 MIX/MATRIX SEND section(CS-R10, CSR10- S, CSD-R7) ................................
Table of Contents Channel Job 567 About DCA/Mute groups library................................................................ 567 About DCA.. .......................................................................................... 568 Assigning channels to a DCA (Selecting the channels that will belong to a specific DCA)......................................................................................... 569 Assigning channels to a DCA (Selecting the DCAs to which a specific channel will belong).
Table of Contents Initializing channel parameters............................................................... 600 CH DEFAULT popup window.. .................................................................. 601 Parameters to be copied......................................................................... 602 GEQ/PEQ/Automixer 605 Graphic EQ, parametric EQ and Automixer.. .............................................. 605 About using a graphic EQ (GEQ)................................................
Table of Contents Using plug-ins.. ..................................................................................... 644 PLUG-IN RACK page of the RACK&REC screen............................................. 645 RACK MOUNT popup window................................................................... 646 PLUG-IN ASSIGNMENT popup window....................................................... 647 Plug-in screen.......................................................................................
Table of Contents Controlling the Comp276 plug-in parameters.. .......................................... 696 Controlling the Buss Comp 369 plug-in parameters..................................... 697 Controlling the MBC4 plug-in parameters.................................................. 701 Controlling the DaNSe plug-in parameters.. .............................................. 704 Controlling the OpenDeck plug-in parameters.. ......................................... 706 Using the Tap Tempo function..
Table of Contents Setting up DAW software.. ...................................................................... 748 Audio recording and playback.. ............................................................... 749 Scene memory 750 About the conceptual memory diagram.. .................................................. 750 About scene memories.. ......................................................................... 752 Using the keys in the SCENE MEMORY section.. ..................................
Table of Contents Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall (GPI OUT).. ........................................................................................... 794 GPI field.. ............................................................................................. 796 Playing back an audio file in tandem with scene recall (PLAYBACK LINK).. ..... 797 PLAYBACK LINK field.. ............................................................................
Table of Contents File 837 SAVE/LOAD.. ......................................................................................... 837 Data handled by a settings file................................................................. 838 Saving the RIVAGE PM series’s settings on a USB flash drive......................... 840 SAVE SELECT screen............................................................................... 842 Loading a file from a USB flash drive...............................................
Table of Contents User Setup 876 Preference settings................................................................................ 876 SURFACE SETTINGS1.............................................................................. 877 SURFACE SETTINGS2.............................................................................. 879 SCREEN SETTINGS.................................................................................. 882 MISC.. ...............................................................
Table of Contents Using Program Changes to recall scenes.. ................................................. 932 MIDI/GPI window (PROGRAM CHANGE page).............................................. 935 MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE popup window.................................................... 936 Using Control Changes to control parameters............................................ 938 MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE popup window.................................................... 940 MIDI/GPI window (CONTROL CHANGE page)...
Table of Contents Console Status 972 Setting the date and time of the internal clock........................................... 972 DATE/TIME popup window.. .................................................................... 974 Panel Settings 975 Specifying the brightness of the touch screens, LEDs, channel name displays, and lamps............................................................................................. 975 Console Lock.............................................................
About the Relevant Manuals > About the Relevant Manuals About the Relevant Manuals About the Relevant Manuals The manuals related to the RIVAGE PM series are organized as follows. Paper manuals RIVAGE PM10 System Setup Guide RIVAGE PM7 System Setup Guide This guide provides an overview of the RIVAGE PM series, and explains step by step how to set up the system from connecting devices to producing sound. Manuals for each device The manual for each device describes part names and functions of that device.
Component Structure > Control surface Component Structure Control surface The CS-R10 control surface lets you control all functions of the DSP engine. All audio signal operations such as mixing and routing, memory functions, and system settings can be controlled. The following functionality is provided.
Component Structure > Control surface Rear panel 25
Component Structure > Control surface Jack list Jack Connector Number of jacks OMNI IN (ANALOG) XLR-3-31 Type 8 OMNI OUT (ANALOG) XLR-3-32 Type 8 AES/EBU IN XLR-3-31 Type 4 AES/EBU OUT XLR-3-32 Type 4 TO ENGINE (Console Network) etherCON CAT5e 2 WORD CLOCK OUT BNC 1 MIDI IN DIN 5P 1 MIDI OUT DIN 5P 1 PHONES TRS 1/4" (6.
Component Structure > Control surface CS-R10-S Top panel Front panel Rear panel 27
Component Structure > Control surface Jack list Jack Connector Number of jacks OMNI IN (ANALOG) XLR-3-31 Type 8 OMNI OUT (ANALOG) XLR-3-32 Type 8 AES/EBU IN XLR-3-31 Type 4 AES/EBU OUT XLR-3-32 Type 4 TO ENGINE (Console Network) etherCON CAT5e 2 WORD CLOCK OUT BNC 1 MIDI IN DIN 5P 1 MIDI OUT DIN 5P 1 PHONES TRS 1/4" (6.
Component Structure > Control surface CS-R5 Top panel CH12 CH12 CH12 PAN : 0 PAN : 0 PAN : 0 73-84 UDK UDK 85-96 UDK UDK 13-24 25-36 97-108 UDK UDK 25-36 37-48 1-12 109-120 UDK UDK 37-48 49-60 - UDK UDK 49-60 61-72 - UDK UDK 61-72 13-24 1-12 Front panel Rear panel CONTROL SURFACE MODEL CS-R10 100-240V 50/60Hz 380W 100-240V 380W MADE IN JAPAN 380W 100-240V INPUT : 415W 100-240V 380W ZN36590- 08 CS-R10 100-240V 380W CS-R10 AC100-240V 380W KTC XU090031-15015 M
Component Structure > Control surface Jack list Jack Connector Number of jacks OMNI IN (ANALOG) XLR-3-31 Type 8 OMNI OUT (ANALOG) XLR-3-32 Type 8 AES/EBU IN XLR-3-31 Type 2 AES/EBU OUT XLR-3-32 Type 2 TO ENGINE (Console Network) etherCON CAT5e 2 MIDI IN DIN 5P 1 MIDI OUT DIN 5P 1 PHONES TRS 1/4" (6.
Component Structure > Control surface CS-R3 Top panel Front panel rear panel 31
Component Structure > Control surface Rear panel Jack Connector Number of jacks OMNI IN (ANALOG) XLR-3-31 Type 8 OMNI OUT (ANALOG) XLR-3-32 Type 8 TO ENGINE (Console Network) etherCON CAT5e 2 MIDI IN DIN 5P 1 MIDI OUT DIN 5P 1 PHONES TRS 1/4" (6.
Component Structure > Digital mixing console Digital mixing console All audio signal operations such as mixing and routing, memory functions, and system settings can be controlled. This unit also has a built-in DSP engine that handles 120 input, 60 mix, 24 matrix, and 2 stereo channels of audio processing.
Component Structure > Digital mixing console Jack Connector Number of jacks OMNI OUT (ANALOG) XLR-3-32 Type 8 AES/EBU IN XLR-3-31 Type 4 AES/EBU OUT XLR-3-32 Type 4 WORD CLOCK IN BNC 1 WORD CLOCK OUT BNC 1 MIDI IN DIN 5P 1 MIDI OUT DIN 5P PHONES TRS 1/4" (6.
Component Structure > About RIVAGE PM Editor About RIVAGE PM Editor This application software enables you to access the same functions that are available on the control surface. You can use your computer to perform off-line editing by preparing the RIVAGE PM series settings in advance, and to monitor and adjust those settings (on-line monitoring/operation). You can connect a computer with RIVAGE PM Editor installed (called PM Editor elsewhere in this book) to a DSP engine or a control surface.
Component Structure > DSP engine DSP engine This is a DSP engine that performs all of the RIVAGE PM series’s audio processing such as mixing and plug-ins. It provides four HY card slots and two MY card slots as well as control input/output connectors for external equipment. Two power supply units are built-in, providing redundant power. DSP-R10、DSP-RX、DSP-RX-EX Front panel * The DSP-RX does not feature the EX badge that is attached to the lower center on the front panel of the DSP-RX-EX.
Component Structure > DSP engine Jack Connector Number of jacks TO CONSOLE (Console Network) etherCON CAT5e 2 WORD CLOCK IN BNC 1 WORD CLOCK OUT BNC 1 NETWORK (PC) etherCON CAT5 1 NETWORK etherCON CAT5 1 MIDI IN DIN 5P 1 MIDI OUT DIN 5P 1 TC IN XLR-3-31 Type 1 GPI D-Sub 25P (Female) 1 REMOTE D-Sub 9P (Male) 1 FAULT OUTPUT Euroblock 3P 1 AC INLET V-Lock Type 2 Slot list Slot Number MY CARD SLOT 2 HY CARD SLOT 4 About the HY card slots Each HY card slot 1 – 4 is 25
Component Structure > I/O rack I/O rack This is an I/O rack for input/output of analog audio signals and digital audio signals of various formats including AES/EBU to and from the DSP engine via a TWINLANe network card installed in HY card slot 1. Two power supply units are built-in, providing redundant power.
Component Structure > I/O rack Rear panel Jack list Jack Connector Number of jacks WORD CLOCK IN BNC 1 WORD CLOCK OUT BNC 1 NETWORK etherCON CAT5 1 FAULT OUTPUT Euroblock 3P 1 AC INLET V-Lock Type 2 Slot list Slot Number RY CARD SLOT 6 MY CARD SLOT 2 HY CARD SLOT 2 About the HY card slots HY card slot 1 of the I/O rack is only for a TWINLANe network card. HY card slot 2 is reserved for Dante/MADI. HY card slot 1 is 256-in/out, and HY card slot 2 is 128-in/out.
Component Structure > I/O rack RPio222 Front panel Rear panel Jack list Jack Connector Number of jacks WORD CLOCK IN BNC 1 WORD CLOCK OUT BNC 1 NETWORK etherCON CAT5 1 FAULT OUTPUT Euroblock 3P 1 AC INLET V-Lock Type 2 Slot list Slot Number RY CARD SLOT 2 MY CARD SLOT 2 HY CARD SLOT 2 40
Component Structure > I/O rack About the HY card slots HY card slot 1 of the I/O rack is only for a TWINLANe network card. HY card slot 2 is reserved for Dante/MADI. HY card slot 1 is 256-in/out, and HY card slot 2 is 128-in/out.
Component Structure > RY cards RY cards RY cards are 16-channel input/output cards. They support 16-channel input/output regardless of the sampling frequency. ■ Mic/line analog input card (RY16-ML-SILK) This is a 16-channel mic/line analog input card featuring a newly developed mic preamp and Rupert Neve Designs’ “Silk” processing modeled in the digital domain. See “Input channel I/O unit section” (p.352) for more information regarding the Silk processing.
Component Structure > HY card HY card The HY cards allow multiple channels of digital audio signals and control signals to be transferred. ■ TWINLANe interface card This is a 256-in/256-out interface card that supports Yamaha’s proprietary TWINLANe audio transfer network protocol. HY256-TL It uses multi-mode optical fiber cables such as Neutrik’s opticalCON DUO to allow transmission between devices up to 300 meters apart.
Component Structure > HY card HY144-D-SRC This interface card features five options for SRC mode, which you can select according to your purpose. It is a 144-channel, digital I/O card used for an HY card slot that supports the Dante digital audio network. ■ Audio interface card HY128-MD This audio interface card transmits and receives up to 128-in/128-out channels of MADI signals. It supports redundant connections via two fiber optic lines and two coaxial lines.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > Selected Channel section Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) Selected Channel section This section enables you to adjust parameters for the selected channel. a [ISOLATE] key Switches Isolate on or off. The Isolate function enables you to protect the channel from any recall operations for scenes or libraries.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > Selected Channel section b [RCL SAFE] key You can switch RECALL SAFE on or off. The Recall Safe function protects certain parameters of a channel from scene recall operations. c [MUTE SAFE] key You can switch MUTE SAFE on or off. The Mute Safe function protects a channel from mute operations. d TO ST [A]/[B] keys Switch on or off the signal sent from the channel to stereo bus A or B. e LED meter Displays the channel signal level.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > INPUT/A.GAIN/SILK/D.GAIN/DELAY INPUT/A.GAIN/SILK/D.GAIN/DELAY INPUT/A.GAIN/SILK/D.GAIN/DELAY This section enables you to adjust parameters for the selected channel. a INPUT [A]/[B] keys Switch the input source for the selected input channel. b [ANALOG GAIN] knob Sets the analog gain for the head amp. c [+48V] key Switches phantom power (+48V) on or off. d SILK [TEXTURE] knob Adjusts the intensity of SILK processing.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > INPUT/A.GAIN/SILK/D.GAIN/DELAY e SILK [ON] key Switches the SILK on or off. SILK processing can be applied only to specific channels to bring the corresponding parts to life within the mix, or to all channels to add depth and perspective to the mix overall. f SILK [BLUE/RED] key Toggles between two SILK characteristics (BLUE and RED): “BLUE” for solidity and power, and “RED” for sparkling energy.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > EQUALIZER EQUALIZER This section enables you to adjust parameters for the selected channel. a EQUALIZER [1-4]/[(5-8)] keys Switch the EQ bands for which you want to make settings. Pressing both [1-4] and [5-8] keys simultaneously will set the gain for all bands to 0 (FLAT). b EQUALIZER [ON] key Switches EQ on or off. c EQUALIZER [SHELF] key Switches peaking filter to shelving filter. d EQ display Indicates parameters for each EQ band.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > LPF/HPF LPF/HPF This section enables you to adjust parameters for the selected channel. a LPF/HPF [FREQUENCY] knobs Specify the cutoff frequency of LPF and HPF respectively. b LPF/HPF display Indicates the LPF and HPF settings. c LPF/HPF [ON] keys Switch the LPF and HPF on or off respectively. d LPF/HPF [SLOPE] keys Switch the LPF and HPF slope settings respectively.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > DCA/MUTE/INSERT DCA/MUTE/INSERT This section enables you to adjust parameters for the selected channel. a DCA ASSIGN LEDs Indicate the assigned DCAs. b MUTE GROUP ASSIGN LEDs Indicate the assigned Mute Groups. c INSERT [PLUG-INS] key Enables you to recall a parameter setting screen for the inserted plug-in. d INSERT 1/2 [ON] keys Switch INSERT1 and INSERT2 on or off respectively.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > DYNAMICS DYNAMICS This section enables you to adjust parameters for the selected channel. a DYNAMICS 1/2 IN LED Indicates the Dynamics input level. b DYNAMICS 1/2 GR LED Indicates the amount of Dynamics gain reduction. c DYNAMICS 1/2 [<]/[>] keys Switch parameters that are indicated on the DYNAMICS display. d DYNAMICS 1/2 setting knobs Set parameters that are indicated on the DYNAMICS display.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > MIX/MATRIX SENDS MIX/MATRIX SENDS This section enables you to adjust parameters for the selected channel. a MIX/MATRIX SENDS knobs Adjust the send levels for the corresponding buses. b MIX/MATRIX SENDS [PRE] keys Toggle the send point between PRE and POST. If a key lights up, the send point is set to PRE. c MIX/MATRIX SENDS [ON] keys Switch the send signal to the corresponding bus on or off.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > MIX/MATRIX SENDS e MIX/MATRIX SENDS [MIX]/[MATRIX] keys Switch the type of the send destination bus. f MIX/MATRIX SENDS [1-12]/[13-24]/[25-36]/[37-48]/[49-60]/[61-72] keys Selects a bank for the send destination bus.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > UTILITY section UTILITY section The UTILITY section is located on the top panel.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > UTILITY section a POWER Indicator Lights when AC power to the unit is ON. If both power switches A and B are turned on, this indicator will light green. If either power switch A or B is turned on, it will light red. If the RIVAGE PM series is not started, it will light orange. b USB port Enables you to connect a USB device (such as a mouse, keyboard, or USB flash drive).
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > SCENE MEMORY section SCENE MEMORY section The section, located on the top panel, enables you to control scene memories and monitoring operations. a [OVERLAY] key Press this button to display the OVERLAY SETTING screen. While pressing and holding down the [SHIFT] key, press the [OVERLAY] key to switch Overlay on or off. While Overlay is turned on, press and hold down the [OVERLAY] key to enter Overlay edit mode.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > SCENE MEMORY section e [PREVIEW] key Turns Preview mode on or off. f [STORE] key Stores the current mix data to the selected scene memory. g [INC]/[DEC] keys Enable you to select the scene number of a scene that you want to store or recall. h [RECALL] key Enables you to recall a stored scene from scene memory.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > USER DEFINED KEYS/KNOBS section USER DEFINED KEYS/KNOBS section The USER DEFINED KEYS/KNOBS section is located on the top panel. a USER DEFINED [A]/[B]/[C]/[D] BANK keys Select the bank ([A], [B], [C], or [D]) for the USER DEFINED knobs or USER DEFINED keys. b USER DEFINED KNOBS displays Indicate the functions assigned to the USER DEFINED knobs.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > USER DEFINED KEYS/KNOBS section c USER DEFINED KNOBS [1]/[2]/[3]/[4] Control the functions as assigned by the user. d USER DEFINED KEYS displays Indicate the functions assigned to the USER DEFINED keys. e USER DEFINED KEYS [1]–[12] Control the functions as assigned by the user.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > Touch Screen section (bay L, bay C) Touch Screen section (bay L, bay C) The Touch Screen section is located on the top panel. Bay L Bay C Bay R 1 2 3 4 Bay A bay consists of a group of 12 faders located across the Touch Screen section and the Channel Strip section. The CS-R10 and CSD-R7 contain three bays; the CS-R10-S contains two bays. You can control these bays independently.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > Touch Screen section (bay L, bay C) a Touch screen This is a touch screen that you can operate by touching it with your finger to select menus or set parameters. Please note that you cannot operate the unit by touching multiple points simultaneously. NOTICE ( Never use a sharp or pointed object such as your fingernail to operate the touch screens. Doing so may scratch the screens and render the touch screens inoperable.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > Channel Strip section (bay L, bay R, bay C) Channel Strip section (bay L, bay R, bay C) The Channel Strip section is located on the top panel. a Screen encoder (bay L and C only) Controls the knob currently selected on the touch screen. The knob function varies depending on the screen currently displayed.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > Channel Strip section (bay L, bay R, bay C) b Channel strip encoder Adjusts the gain, pan, and the other parameters of the channel. You can assign five parameter functions (selected from the following list) to this encoder, and use the [UP]/[DOWN] keys to select the function. c ( PAN/BALANCE ( ANALOG GAIN ( DIGITAL GAIN ( AUTO A.G./D.G.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > Channel Strip section (bay L, bay R, bay C) g [ON] key Switches the channel on or off. If the channel is on, the key LED will light. In SENDS ON FADER mode, this key works as an on/off switch for signals sent from each channel to the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus. h Channel name display Indicates the channel name, fader level, etc. i Channel color indicator Indicates the channel color.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > [TOUCH AND TURN] knob/layer selection [TOUCH AND TURN] knob/layer selection The section, located on the top panel, enables you to operate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob and select a layer. a PIN indicator Lights when the Pinning function for the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob is ON. (This feature will be supported by a future update.) b [TOUCH AND TURN] knob Controls the parameter of the knob you are touching on the touch screen.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > [TOUCH AND TURN] knob/layer selection c Channel strip encoder display Indicates the function that has been assigned to the channel strip encoder. d UP [@U@]/DOWN [@D@] keys Enable you to select the function that you want to control using the channel strip encoder. e [SHIFT] key Combine with another key to perform certain functions. For more information, refer to the Special Key Command List for the RIVAGE PM Series.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > Front panel of the control surface Front panel of the control surface CD-R10 CD-R10-S 68
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > Front panel of the control surface CSD-R7 a Brightness control knob Adjusts brightness of the light below the console. b Headphone hanger To use the hanger, pull out the knob, and then turn it counter-clockwise. (The hanger will be locked in place.) To put away the hanger, turn the knob clockwise to unlock it, and then push it in. c PHONES A/B [LEVEL] knobs Adjust the level of the signal output from the PHONES OUT jacks respectively.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > Rear panel of the control surface Rear panel of the control surface CD-R10 CD-R10-S 70
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > Rear panel of the control surface CSD-R7 a LAMP jacks These 4-pin female XLR output connectors are used to supply power to Yamaha LA1L gooseneck lamps supplied with the unit (CS-R10, CSD-R7: 4 jacks; CS-R10-S: 3 jacks). b MIDI OUT/IN jacks These connectors are used to transmit and receive MIDI messages to/from external MIDI devices.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > Rear panel of the control surface Male XLR plug 1 (Ground)) 3 (cold)) 2 (Hot)) h OMNI OUT jacks These are balanced XLR-3-32 male output jacks that transmit analog audio signals. Female XLR plug 2 (Hot)) 3 (cold)) 1 (Ground)) i AES/EBU jacks Both input and output jacks feature built-in sampling rate converters. IN These are balanced XLR-3-31 female input jacks that accept digital audio signals in AES/EBU format.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > Rear panel of the control surface m TO ENGINE OUT/IN connectors (CS-R10, CS-R10-S), CONSOLE NETWORK connector (CSD-R7) These RJ-45 connectors allow the unit to be connected to a console network in a ring topology via Ethernet cables (CAT5e or higher recommended). NOTE Use an STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) cable to prevent electromagnetic interference.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > Rear panel of the control surface t AC IN connectors Use these sockets to connect the supplied power cords. First connect the AC power cords to this unit, and then insert the power cord plugs into AC outlets. Insert the cable plugs all the way until they lock in place securely. The supplied AC power cords feature a V-lock mechanism via a latch, which prevents the power cords from disconnecting accidentally.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > Rear panel of the control surface y HY card slots Enable you to install optional HY cards and connect to an I/O rack, such as RPio622, to expand I/O ports.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > Precautions regarding using the NETWORK connector Precautions regarding using the NETWORK connector Each component in the RIVAGE PM series features a NETWORK connector on the rear panel. Do not connect these connectors to any unsupported devices (such as a computer you might use to update the firmware or for external control). Otherwise, unexpected input of communications traffic may jeopardize system operation.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) > Precautions regarding using the NETWORK connector Do NOT connect multiple components to the network switch RPio622 RPio222 Do not connect multiple components to the network switch. (Otherwise, an Ethernet loop will be generated.) These will be connected to each other internally via the I/ O Network. DSP-R10,DSP-RX(-EX) These will be connected to each other internally via the console Network.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > Selected Channel section Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) Selected Channel section This section enables you to adjust parameters for the selected channel. The knobs in the Selected Channel section feature the Touch Sense function.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > DYNAMICS DYNAMICS This section enables you to select DYNAMICS1 or 2, and make detailed settings. You can also view the input level and the gain reduction of selected Dynamics. 23 4 1 7 6 5 a 8 9 ) DYNAMICS [1]/[2] keys These enable selection of Dynamics 1 or 2. b DYNAMICS 1/2 IN LEDs Indicates the input level of selected Dynamics. c DYNAMICS 1/2 GR LEDs Indicates the gain reduction amount of selected Dynamics.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > GAIN GAIN 1 2 3 4 5 a [GAIN] knob Controls the analog gain or digital gain. b HPF [ON] key Switches the HPF on or off. c [HPF] knob Adjusts the HPF cutoff frequency. d [PAN] knob Adjusts the panning of the signal sent to the stereo buses. e [Fn] (Function) knob While pressing and holding down this knob, touch a parameter to assign the function.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > EQUALIZER EQUALIZER 1 2 3 4 a EQUALIZER [ON] key Switches EQ on or off. b EQUALIZER [Q] knob Specify the Q value. c EQUALIZER [GAIN] knobs Adjust the gain. d EQUALIZER [FREQUENCY] knobs Adjust the frequency.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > UTILITY section UTILITY section 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a POWER Indicator Lights when AC power to the unit is ON. If both power switches A and B are turned on, this indicator will light green. If either power switch A or B is turned on, it will light red. If the control surface is in the process of starting up, or if one or both power switches remain turned on after the control surface is shut down, the indicator will light orange.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > UTILITY section b USB port Enables you to connect a USB device (such as a mouse, keyboard, or USB flash drive). Use a USB flash drive to store the system’s internal data and to load the stored data into the system. USB flash drive format The FAT16 and FAT32 formats are supported. Write Protection Some USB flash drives feature write protection that prevents data from being erased inadvertently.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > SCENE MEMORY section SCENE MEMORY section 4 1 2 3 5 6 8 7 a [OVERLAY] key Press this button to display the OVERLAY SETTING screen. While pressing and holding down the [SHIFT] key (see eon page 16), press the [OVERLAY] key to switch Overlay on or off. While Overlay is turned on, press and hold down the [OVERLAY] key to enter Overlay edit mode. b [UNDO] key Cancels the most recent operation of storing, recalling or updating.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > SCENE MEMORY section e [PREVIEW] key Turns Preview mode on or off. f [STORE] key Stores the current scene settings to the selected scene memory. If you select the existing scene as the store destination, it will be overwritten. NOTE Use the [UPDATE] key to overwrite the current scene. g [INC]/[DEC] keys Enable you to select the scene number of a scene that you want to store or recall.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > USER DEFINED KEYS section USER DEFINED KEYS section ■CS-R5 1 2 3 a USER DEFINED KEYS BANK [A]/[B]/[C]/[D] keys Enable you to select the bank ([A], [B], [C], or [D]) for the USER DEFINED keys.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > USER DEFINED KEYS section b USER DEFINED KEYS [1]-[12] keys Control the functions as assigned by the user. c USER DEFINED KEYS displays Indicate the functions assigned to the USER DEFINED keys.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > Touch Screen section Touch Screen section Bay A “bay” consists of a group of 12 faders located across the Touch Screen section and the Channel Strip section. The control surface contains three bays.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > Touch Screen section Bay C VIEW RANGE RATIO OUTGAIN ATTACK HOLD ATTACK RELEASE RECORDING DECAY THRESHOLD OVERLAY KNEE UNDO USB POWER ASSIGN UPDATE PREVIEW SCENE MEMORY TALKBACK SYSTEM GAIN DEC STORE INC RECALL ON USER DEFINED KEYS GAIN BANK 1 MONITOR / C 2 BANK 3 2 / D 4 1 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 3 12 A 4 GAIN B ENCODER ASSIGN GAIN HOME 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > Touch Screen section b [VIEW] key Recalls and toggles between the OVERVIEW and SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screens. SEND / USER DEFINED KNOB This section enables you to specify the send bus destination, and adjust the send level for the corresponding bus. You can also switch to the USER DEFINED KNOB function to control the assigned function. c [ASSIGN] key Displays a screen that enables you to specify the send destination bus and switch to the USER DEFINED KNOB.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > Channel Strip section Channel Strip section 1 2 3 4 5 6 a [ENCODER ASSIGN] key Displays a screen that enables you to switch between the Screen Encoder function and the Channel Encoder function. You can use only the Channel Encoder function for channel strips A and B. b [HOME] key Recalls a group of settings for the bay.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > Channel Strip section d [TOUCH AND TURN] knob Controls the parameter of the knob you selected by touching the touch screen. e [SHIFT] key Combine with another key to perform a certain function. For more information, refer to the Special Key Command List for the RIVAGE PM Series. f [SENDS ON FADER] key Turns SENDS ON FADER mode on and off. While SENDS ON FADER mode is enabled, the input faders will control the send levels of the corresponding buses.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > Channel Strip section ■CS-R5 93
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > Channel Strip section 94
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > Channel Strip section ■CS-R3 1 A B 1 A B 7 8 ! % 9 @ # ) 95
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > Channel Strip section g Strip encoder You can use the Screen Encoder function and the Channel Encoder function for channel strips 1–12. Use the ap.91 to toggle between these two functions. You can use only the Channel Encoder function for channel strips A and B. ( Screen Encoder function: Up to 12 parameters can be assigned by selecting controls on the screen. ( Channel Encoder function: Adjusts the gain, pan, and the other parameters of the channel.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > Channel Strip section ^ & * ( A B p INPUT [1]/[2] keys Enable you to select an input layer. Press the INPUT [1] key to select the INPUT 1-72 layer. Press the INPUT [2] key to select the INPUT 73-144 layer. NOTE Press the INPUT [1] key and INPUT [2] key simultaneously to select the INPUT 145-288 layer. Press these two keys simultaneously again to select the INPUT 1-144 layer.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > Channel Strip section u Layer Select [A]/[B]/[C]/[D]/[E]/[F] keys Enable you to select a layer. Different layers are recalled to the faders depending on the combination of the keys, as shown in the table below: (*Please refer to the Note regarding thep INPUT [1]/[2] keys.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > Front panel Front panel ■CS-R5 1 a 2 1 PHONES A/B [LEVEL] knobs Adjust the level of the signal output from the PHONES OUT jacks respectively. b PHONES A/B output jacks These are headphone jacks for monitoring the MONITOR or CUE signal.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > Front panel ■CS-R3 1 a 2 PHONES [LEVEL] knob Adjust the level of the signal output from the PHONES OUT jacks respectively. b PHONES output jack This is the headphone jack for monitoring the MONITOR or CUE signal.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > Rear panel Rear panel ■CS-R5 1 6 7 2 3 1 & 9 8 1 5 4 * ) ! ( % # @ $ ^ ■CS-R3 1 1 2 9 6 7 3 4 5 ) ! ( & % ^ # @ $ 101 *
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > Rear panel a LAMP jacks These four 4-pin female XLR output jacks are used to supply power to optional Yamaha LA1L gooseneck lamps. b MIDI OUT/IN jacks These connectors are used to transmit and receive MIDI messages to/from external MIDI devices. c GPI connector This is a D-sub 25-pin female connector that allows communication (8-in, 8-out) with a GPI-equipped external device. d [FAN] switch Sets the internal cooling fan to operate at either HIGH or LOW speed.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > Rear panel Female XLR plug 2 (Hot)) 3 (cold)) 1 (Ground)) h AES/EBU jacks（CS-R5） Both input and output jacks feature built-in sampling rate converters. IN These are balanced XLR-3-31 female input jacks that accept digital audio signals in AES/EBU format. OUT These are balanced XLR-3-32 male output jacks for outputting digital audio signals in the AES/EBU format.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > Rear panel The unit is preparing to connect to the console network. If it continues flashing, the system is not functioning properly. If the problem persists after you take the following actions, please contact your Yamaha dealer. Green (flashing) Green (lit steadily) n ( Make sure that the cables are connected properly. ( Make sure that the cables are securely inserted (locked in). ( Turn the power to the RIVAGE PM series system off and then on.
Part Names & Functions (CS-R5,CS-R3) > Rear panel r AC IN connectors Use these sockets to connect the supplied power cords. First connect the AC power cords to this unit, and then insert the power cord plugs into AC outlets. Insert the cable plugs all the way until they lock in place securely. The supplied AC power cords feature a V-lock mechanism via a latch, which prevents the power cords from disconnecting accidentally.
Basic operations on the panel > Basic touch screen operations Basic operations on the panel Basic touch screen operations This section explains the basic procedures you can perform on the unit’s touch screens. In general, you will operate the system using an appropriate combination of the operations explained here. Pressing the touch screens You will use this operation primarily to switch screens and pages, to select the parameter to be operated, and to turn a button on/off.
Basic operations on the panel > Basic operations on the top panel Basic operations on the top panel This section explains the basic procedures you can perform on the top panel. Screen encoder operations Screen encoders Screen encoders 1–12 are used to operate the knobs selected for operation in the touch screens. When you press to select a knob that can be controlled by the screen encoders, a thick frame appears around it.
Basic operations on the panel > Basic operations on the top panel Hold this down for two seconds or longer to enter shutdown (power off procedure).
Basic operations on the panel > Shut down (power-off procedure) Shut down (power-off procedure) Before you shut down the control surface, Yamaha recommends that you store the current status to scene memory. If you change the connection status of the components after the power is turned off, some settings, such as patching, may be altered when you turn the power on again. For instructions on storing scenes, see “Storing a scene” on page 313.
Basic operations on the panel > Other convenient functions Other convenient functions The RIVAGE PM series provides various other convenient functions. CONSOLE LOCK You can temporarily prohibit control surface operation in order to prevent unwanted operation. This setting completely disables operations of the panel and touch screen, so that controls cannot be operated by an accidental touch or by an unauthorized third party while the operator is taking a break.
Basic operations on the panel > On-screen user interface On-screen user interface This section explains various user interface components shown in the touch screens, and how to use them. Tabs Tabs enable you to switch between multiple pages. Each tab indicates its page name. Buttons Buttons are used to execute specific functions, to switch parameters on or off, or to select one of multiple choices.
Basic operations on the panel > On-screen user interface Knobs in the screen provide visual confirmation of the value of the corresponding parameter. If you press a knob once in the window, a thick frame appears around the knob. This frame indicates that the knob is selected for operations that can be controlled by the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob (pink highlight), [Fn] knob (yellow highlight), or screen encoders (white highlight).
Basic operations on the panel > On-screen user interface Popup windows When you press a button or field for a specific parameter in a screen, a window showing details or a list for that parameter will appear. These windows are called “popup windows.” You can switch between popup windows using tabs as needed. Some popup windows show several buttons called “tool buttons” at the top of the window. You can use these tool buttons to recall libraries or to perform copy and paste operations.
Basic operations on the panel > On-screen user interface Dialog boxes similar to the following enable you to confirm operations you just performed. Press the OK button to execute the operation. The operation will be canceled if you press the CANCEL button.
Basic operations on the panel > Viewing a touch screen Viewing a touch screen The touch screens display the following information: Meter area Menu bar Main area Pouup window Channel name area Meter area The meter area displays various meters. Press any part of the meter area to recall the corresponding fader layer to the panel. Main area The contents of the main area will vary depending on the currently-selected function. Mixing operations will involve mainly the following two types of screens.
Basic operations on the panel > Viewing a touch screen This screen shows all mix parameters of the currently-selected channel. For details about this screen, refer to the “About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen” section. OVERVIEW screen This screen shows the main parameters of 12 channels selected as a layer. For details about this screen, refer to the “About the OVERVIEW screen” section.
Basic operations on the panel > Viewing a touch screen a Selected channel This area shows the number, name, icon, and channel color of the channel that is currently selected for operation. For details on assigning a name, refer to “Entering names.” For details on selecting an icon, refer to ““Changing the name” (p.375).” Press the left side of the selected channel area to select the preceding channel. Press the right side of the area to select the next channel.
Basic operations on the panel > Viewing a touch screen Indicator Conditions Status of the DSP engine Green: Normal D Yellow: Only POWER A or B is enabled. Red: Error (inoperative fan, etc.) Status of the I/O rack Green: Normal R Yellow: Only POWER A or B is enabled. Red: Error (inoperative fan, etc.) OSC (yellow) Oscillator is enabled. ALT (yellow) Alternate function ON TB (yellow) Talkback is enabled.
Basic operations on the panel > Viewing a touch screen j CH JOB (Channel Job) Press this button to access the CH JOB pull-down menu, in which you can copy or initialize the channel settings, etc. k METER When you press this button, a popup menu will appear, enabling you to select the type of channel block to display in the meter area (Meter).
Basic operations on the panel > Viewing a touch screen Channel name area Press the channel name area to switch the selected channel/parameter on the screen. If you switch fader layers, the indication in this area will reflect the change in layer selection. In this way, you can access any channel on screen. Channel name NOTE Switching layers will not affect the selected channel/parameter on the screen. The 12-channel group displayed on the OVERVIEW screen will change.
Basic operations on the panel > Entering names Entering names You can assign a name to each input channel, output channel, and DCA, and assign a title to each scene or library data item when you save it. To assign a name, you will use the keyboard window that is shown in the main area. 1 Access the screen for assigning names. The screen shot below shows how to assign a name to a channel. The box shows the characters you have entered and a cursor that indicates the current position.
Basic operations on the panel > Entering names 3 Enter the subsequent characters in the same way. When entering characters, you can also use the following buttons in the keyboard window. COPY button Copies the string of characters that are selected (highlighted) in the text box. CUT button Deletes and copies the string of characters that are selected (highlighted) in the text box.
Basic operations on the panel > Using tool buttons Using tool buttons The title bar on top of certain popup windows features tool buttons that provide additional functions. These buttons enable you to recall related libraries, or copy channel parameters to another channel. This section explains how to use the tool buttons.
Basic operations on the panel > Using tool buttons 3 Press the COPY button. The current setting will be stored in buffer memory. NOTE ( ( 4 After copying a setting, be sure to paste it to the destination BEFORE you copy another setting. Otherwise, the copied setting (in buffer memory) will be overwritten. You can select only one channel, GEQ/PEQ, or plug-in as the copy source. Press the PASTE button.
Basic operations on the panel > Resetting parameters to default Resetting parameters to default This section explains how to reset the EQ or Dynamics settings of the currently-selected channel, or GEQ/PEQ or Plug-in settings, to their default values. NOTE Pressing the FLAT button for GEQ/PEQ will reset the GAIN parameter for all bands to 0 dB. 1 2 Open a popup window that features tool buttons. Select a channel EQ, Dynamics, or Delay, or GEQ/PEQ or Plug-in, for which you want to reset the parameters.
Basic operations on the panel > Comparing two settings Comparing two settings Using the COMPARE button enables you to switch between and compare the settings stored in buffer memory with the EQ or Dynamics settings of the currently-selected channel, or GEQ/PEQ or Plug-in. This function is useful if you want to compare and listen to the edited data using the settings temporarily stored during the editing process. 1 2 Open a popup window that features tool buttons.
Basic operations on the panel > Comparing two settings 5 Press the COMPARE button to compare the first option and the current (second) option. The first option will be applied to the system. At this time, the second option will be stored in buffer memory. COPY First option First option Buffer memory Edited setting (Second option) First option Buffer memory COMPARE Second option First option Buffer memory 6 Press the COMPARE button repeatedly to listen to options 1 and 2 alternately.
Basic operations on the panel > Using libraries Using libraries This section explains how to use libraries. Using libraries enables you to store and recall the EQ or Dynamics settings of the currently-selected channel, or GEQ/PEQ or Plug-in settings.
Basic operations on the panel > Recalling a preset from a library Recalling a preset from a library This section describes how to recall a preset from a library. 1 Press the LIBRARY tool button. The corresponding Library screen (Recall) will open. 2 Rotate the corresponding screen encoder to select the preset number you want to recall. 3 Press the RECALL button. The selected preset data will be loaded and displayed.
Basic operations on the panel > Library screen (Recall) Library screen (Recall) Each library screen contains the following items. 1 2 3 a USER preset/FACTORY preset switching buttons Switch between the user preset and factory preset display. NOTE The FACTORY preset switching button appears only on library screens for plug-ins that feature factory presets. b List Displays the setting data (presets) stored in the library. The highlighted row in the list indicates that the item is selected for use.
Basic operations on the panel > Storing setting data in a library Storing setting data in a library This section describes how to store setting data in a library. 1 Press the LIBRARY tool button. “Library screen (Store)” (p.132) will open. 2 Rotate the corresponding screen encoder to select the preset number to which you want to store the setting. 3 After you select the store destination, press the STORE button. A dialog will request that you confirm the store operation.
Basic operations on the panel > Library screen (Store) Library screen (Store) Each library screen contains the following items. 1 a 2 STORE button Stores the current-channel EQ or Dynamics setting, or the GEQ/PEQ or Plug-in setting. b UPDATE SELECTED button Stores the current setting by overwriting the selected preset.
Basic operations on the panel > Deleting setting data from a library Deleting setting data from a library This section describes how to delete a preset from a library. 1 Press the LIBRARY tool button. “Library screen (Delete)” (p.134) will open. 2 Rotate the corresponding screen encoder to select the preset number you want to delete. 3 Press the DELETE button. A dialog will request that you confirm the delete operation. 4 To execute the delete operation, press the OK button.
Basic operations on the panel > Library screen (Delete) Library screen (Delete) Each library screen contains the following items. 1 a DELETE button Deletes the preset selected in the list.
Basic operations on the panel > Pair setting Pair setting Adjacent channels can be paired and used as a stereo module. Input channels You can pair either odd/even-numbered channels or even/odd-numbered channels. For single input channels (monaural), the pan level is nominal at the center, and +3 dB at hard left or hard right. For paired input channels, the balance level is nominal at the center, and +3 dB at hard left or hard right.
Basic operations on the panel > Pair setting CH to MIX VARI MIX1- 72 (MATRIX 1- 36) 1 2 to MIX / MATRIX (VARI ) PRE EQ PRE FILTER PRE DYN 1 MONO to MONO PRE DYN 2 PRE FADER POST FADER POST ON ON LEVEL to MIX / MATRIX (VARI ) PRE EQ PRE FILTER PRE DYN 1 MONO to STEREO PRE DYN 2 PRE FADER POST FADER POST ON ON LEVEL to MIX / MATRIX (VARI ) PRE FILTER STEREO to MONO PRE EQ PRE DYN 1 L CH PRE DYN 2 PRE FADER POST FADER POST ON PRE FILTER PRE EQ PRE DYN 1 PRE DYN 2 R CH PRE FADER POST FADER POST ON to MI
Basic operations on the panel > Pair setting MIX/STEREO to MATRIX MATRIX 1 2 to MATRIX(VAR I) STEREO to MONO L CH R CH PRE FILTER PRE DYN PRE FADER POST ON PRE FILTER PRE EQ PRE DYN PRE DELAY PRE FADER POST FADER POST ON PRE EQ PRE DELAY POST FADER LEVEL ON L CH to MATRIX 1 R CH to MATRIX 1 to MATRIX 2- 36 (same as above ) to MATRIX(VAR I) STEREO to STEREO L CH R CH PRE FILTER PRE DYN PRE FADER POST ON PRE FILTER PRE EQ PRE DYN PRE DELAY PRE FADER POST FADER POST ON PRE EQ PRE DELAY POST FADER
Basic operations on the panel > Setting or defeating pairing on the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen Setting or defeating pairing on the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen This section describes how to set up or defeat pairing on the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. 1 Press the [VIEW] key to access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. 2 Press the pair 3 4 Select the channel pairing direction, and then press the OK button. button to access the CHANNEL PAIRING popup window.
Basic operations on the panel > Setting or defeating pairing on the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen 5 Press the OK button. The pairing setting will be defeated.
Screen Overview > About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen Screen Overview About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen This screen shows all mix parameters of the currently-selected channel. ISOLATE 1 a ON button Turns the Isolate function on and off. RECALL SAFE This field enables you to make Recall Safe settings.
Screen Overview > About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen a ON button Switches the Recall Safe status on or off. b Popup button Press this button to access the RECALL SAFE popup window. This button will indicate “PARTIAL” if recall safe applies only to some of the parameters, not to all channel settings. It will indicate “All” if recall safe applies to all parameters. If no parameters are specified, it will indicate “OFF.” SOLO SAFE 1 a ON button Turns the Solo Safe function on and off.
Screen Overview > About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen NOTE If channels are paired for stereo, the PAN knob will be replaced with the BALANCE knob. 4 6 5 In the TO STEREO popup window, if the PAN/BALANCE select button is set to PAN, the L and R PAN knobs d are shown, enabling you to specify the panning of the signal. If you use the ST/LCR mode select button to select LCR, the LCR button e and CSR knob f appear.
Screen Overview > About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen CH MODE field 4 1 2 3 a L/R PATH pull-down menu Appears if the input channels are paired. You can select MONO, STEREO, L/L, or R/R as the audio combination input to the input channels. b NAME popup buttons Press this button to access the “NAME/ICON EDIT popup window” (p.377). c Pair setting popup button Press this button to access the CHANNEL PAIRING popup window.
Screen Overview > About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen ANALOG GAIN field 1 2 3 4 5 a ANALOG GAIN knob Sets the analog gain of the head amp. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, a blue indicator appears, showing the analog gain position at the time the function was turned on. b HA meter Indicates the level immediately after the analog head amp. c +48V indicator Indicates the phantom power (+48V) on or off status for the head amp.
Screen Overview > About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen DIGITAL GAIN field 3 1 2 a Ф (Phase) button Switches the phase of the head amp input signal between normal phase (gray) and reverse phase (orange). b DIGITAL GAIN knob Indicates the digital gain value. Use the screen encoder to adjust the digital gain. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, this knob will adjust the level of the signal input to the selected channel. c GANG button Appears if channels are paired.
Screen Overview > About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen DIRECT OUT field (input channels only) This field enables you to turn Direct Out on/off for the selected input channel. 2 a 1 ON button Turns the Direct Out on or off. b Direct Out patch popup button Press this button to access the “INSERT/D.OUT popup window (1CH)” (p.510). The Direct Out level value will appear to the left of the button.
Screen Overview > About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen EQUALIZER field IN OUT 1 1 3 4 3 2 4 5 8 8 6 6 7 a 7 EQ graph This field indicates the approximate response of the EQ. Press this field to open the “EQ popup window (1ch)” (p.484), in which you can set the HPF, LPF and EQ. b Tabs (Output channels only) Use these tabs to select a band that you want to view on the screen. c EQ IN/OUT level meters Indicate the peak level of signals before and after the EQ.
Screen Overview > About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen e HIGH SHELVING ON/OFF button Turn on this button to switch the HIGH band to a shelving type filter. f LOW SHELVING ON/OFF button Turn on this button to switch the LOW band to a shelving type filter. g BYP (BYPASS) button Temporarily bypasses the EQ for each band. h EQ parameter setting knobs Indicate the Q, FREQUENCY, and GAIN parameters for each band.
Screen Overview > About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen a HPF knob Sets the HPF cutoff frequency. b ON button Switches the HPF on or off. c HPF type select button Enables you to set the HPF attenuation per octave to −6 dB/oct, −12 dB/oct, −18 dB/oct, or −24 dB/oct. DCA/MUTE field This field displays the DCA or mute group to which the channel is assigned. 1 a DCA/mute group popup button Indicates the DCA and mute group to which the channel is assigned.
Screen Overview > About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen b Plug-in buttons If nothing is inserted, each button will indicate “BLANK.” If you press a BLANK button, a window will appear, in which you can insert a plug-in. If a plug-in is already inserted, a window will appear, in which you can set the plug-in parameters. Also, the level indicator will appear in the upper right. NOTE If an inserted plug-in is bypassed, the plug-in button icon will become dark.
Screen Overview > About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 field This field enables you to view and set the Dynamics 1/2 parameters. Press the meter or selected knob to open the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window, in which you can make detailed parameter settings. 1 3 2 4 a 5 DYNAMICS 1 graph Indicates the abbreviated name of the dynamics processor type and the threshold value that are selected for Dynamics 1.
Screen Overview > About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen d Threshold Specifies the threshold. Press one of these knobs to display the parameter name and value in the upper part of the channel name area. e Parameter Indicate the values of parameters that vary depending on the currently-selected dynamics type. Press one of these knobs to display the parameter name and value in the upper part of the channel name area.
Screen Overview > About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen MIX/MATRIX SENDS field 1 a MIX popup buttons (input/MATRIX channels only) For input channels, each button indicates the level of the send signal sent from the selected channel to the MIX bus. For MATRIX channels, each button indicates the level of the send signal from the MIX bus to the selected channel. Press the buttons to recall (roll out) the send parameters to the screen encoders. Press them again to switch the screen to SEND FROM or SEND TO.
Screen Overview > About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen 2 b MATRIX popup buttons (input/MIX/STEREO channels only) Each button indicates the level of the send signal sent from the selected channel to the MATRIX bus. Press the buttons to recall (roll out) the send parameters to the screen encoders. Press them again to switch the screen to SEND FROM or SEND TO.
Screen Overview > About the OVERVIEW screen About the OVERVIEW screen This screen shows the main parameters of 12 channels selected as a layer. Channel name area The upper part of the channel name area displays the channel number and the patching or VSC status. The middle part of the channel name area displays the channel name and channel icon. The lower part of the channel name area displays the overlay or fader status.
Screen Overview > About the OVERVIEW screen Channel OFF Unselected channel Channel ON Channel OFF Channel with Overlay ON Channel with Isolate ON Temporarily-linked channel 156
Screen Overview > About the OVERVIEW screen Unassigned channel HA GAIN field This field enables you to specify the analog/digital gain for the HA (head amp). It also indicates the operating status of the HA. The indication in the field varies depending on the status of patches and the system configuration.
Screen Overview > About the OVERVIEW screen e +48V indicator Indicates the phantom power (+48V) on or off status for the head amp. This indicator is not displayed unless the head amp is patched to the channel. f indicator (input channels only) Indicates the phase setting for the head amp input. g M/S indicator Appears when the M/S Decode Indicator function is enabled. Digital gain parameters 2 1 3 a DIGITAL GAIN knob Indicates the digital gain value.
Screen Overview > About the OVERVIEW screen SILK BLUE on SILK BLUE off SILK RED on SILK RED off DELAY field This field displays the delay status of the corresponding input channel or output channels. Press this field to open the DELAY popup (12CH) popup window. 1 This field displays the delay status of the corresponding input channel or output channels. Press this field to open the DELAY popup (12CH) popup window. a DELAY ON/OFF indicator Indicates the on/off status of the delay.
Screen Overview > About the OVERVIEW screen Level indicator Gray: –∞ Green: <–18 dB Yellow: –18 dB≤, ≤0 dB Red: 0 dB< EQ field This field indicates the approximate response of the EQ. Press this field to open the HPF/EQ (1CH) popup window, in which you can set the HPF, LPF and EQ. This field will be grayed out on channels for which the EQ is disabled. DYNAMICS 1/2 field This field displays the threshold value, meter, and abbreviated dynamics processor type for Dynamics 1/2.
Screen Overview > About the OVERVIEW screen To select the 12 destination buses, use the MIX/MATRIX SENDS [1-12]/[13-24]/[25-36]/[37-48]/[49-60]/[61-72] keys on the panel. Use the screen encoders or the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the send level for each bus. Press the knob of the bus you want to operate to assign the knob to one of the screen encoders. If it is assigned to the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob, press the knob once again to open the SENDS TO popup window.
Screen Overview > About the OVERVIEW screen TO STEREO field This field displays the on/off status and pan/balance setting of the signal sent to the STEREO bus. Press this knob and you will be able to use the screen encoder and the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the value. If you press the knob once again, the TO STEREO popup window will appear. This field varies depending on the type of the selected channel.
Screen Overview > About the OVERVIEW screen NOTE If MUTE MASTER is on or DCA MASTER is off on the muted channel(s), the corresponding indicators will flash. Mute group field A mute group (1–12) to which the channel is assigned is displayed on the third row in this field. If the channel has been temporarily removed (SAFE) from the mute group, it will be highlighted. Press this field to open the “DCA/MUTE ASSIGN window (1CH)” (p.577).
Quick Guide > Basic system Quick Guide Basic system This section describes a basic procedure for setting up your RIVAGE PM10 system.
Quick Guide > Basic system “Installing optional cards” (p.166) “Assigning the Unit ID” (p.172) “Connecting the devices” (p.174) “Turning on the power to the system” (p.176) “Setting the word clock” (p.177) “Assigning channels to the TWINLANe network” (p.178) Patching the input ports Patching the output ports “Specifying the analog gain for the HA (head amp)” (p.187) “Routing a signal to the STEREO bus” (p.
Quick Guide > Installing optional cards Installing optional cards Installing the HY cards Insert each TWINLANe network card into HY card slot 1 on the DSP engine and the I/O rack. Installing an HY Card 1 Make sure that both power indicators are off. CAUTION ( Installing or removing a card while the power is on may lead to component failure or electric shock. 2 Remove the screws that fasten the slot cover to remove the slot cover. Keep the cover and fixing screws in a safe place for future use.
Quick Guide > Installing optional cards 3 Align both edges of the HY card with the guide rails inside the slot, and then insert the card into the slot with the card installation lever pressed down.
Quick Guide > Installing optional cards NOTE For information on cards supported by each slot, refer to “Component Structure.” Push the card all the way into the slot so that the connector at the end of the card is correctly inserted into the connector inside the slot. 4 Pull up the card installation lever to lock in the card. Make sure that the lever claw is securely locked under the bottom part of the slot.
Quick Guide > Installing optional cards NOTE If the lever claw does not lock in, pull up the card slightly, then push it in. 5 Affix the card using the screws that were previously used to affix the slot cover. If the card is not fastened securely, component failure or malfunction may occur. Installing the RY card Insert the Mic/line input card (RY16-ML-SILK) into RY card slot 1 on the I/O rack. Insert the analog output card (RY16-DA) into RY card slot 2 on the I/O rack.
Quick Guide > Installing optional cards Installing an RY Card 1 Make sure that both power indicators are off. CAUTION ( Installing or removing a card while the power is on may lead to component failure or electric shock. 2 Remove the screws that fasten the slot cover to remove the slot cover. Keep the cover and fixing screws in a safe place for future use.
Quick Guide > Installing optional cards 3 Align both edges of the card with the guide rails inside the slot, and then insert the card into the slot. Push the card all the way into the slot so that the connector at the end of the card is correctly inserted into the connector inside the slot. 4 Fasten the card using the screws attached to the card. If the card is not fastened securely, component failure or malfunction may occur.
Quick Guide > Assigning the Unit ID Assigning the Unit ID You need to assign a unique Unit ID to each device so that the system will recognize the connected devices. You can view the Unit ID on the LCD screen of each device. Assigning the Unit ID to the DSP engine and I/O rack 1 Turn on the power (A and B) to the DSP engine and I/O rack to which you want to assign the Unit ID. The Unit ID number will appear. I/O rack: M1 - 8, S1 - 8 DSP engine: 1 - 4 (1A/1B - 4A/4B) 2 Press the [MENU] key.
Quick Guide > Assigning the Unit ID 4 Press the [ENTER] key. The Unit ID setup screen appears. 5 6 Press the [▲]/[▼] keys to select the desired Unit ID number. Press the [ENTER] key to confirm the selected Unit ID number. If you press the [MENU] key before the Unit ID setting is confirmed, the initial screen will be displayed. 7 The device will display the “setup complete” screen and automatically restart. 8 Assign the Unit ID for other devices in the same manner.
Quick Guide > Connecting the devices Connecting the devices Make sure that the power indicators are off. Connecting the control surface to the DSP engine CS-R10 TO ENGINE OUT IN IN OUT TO CONSOLE DSP-R10 Use Ethernet cables to connect the TO ENGINE OUT/IN jacks of the control surface to the TO CONSOLE OUT/ IN jacks of the DSP engine.
Quick Guide > Connecting the devices RPio622 RY16-DA RY16-ML-SILK 1 Analog input connection Connect a microphone or line-level component to the input jacks of the RY card (RY16-ML-SILK). NOTE In the default status, there are no patch settings for these input jacks. Before you can use signals at these jacks as the input, you need to make patch settings.
Quick Guide > Turning on the power to the system Turning on the power to the system After the Unit ID setting and connections are complete, turn on the power to all connected devices. Once the control surface starts, information on the connected devices will automatically be collected and all devices will synchronize. A popup window will appear. Select the direction of the data synchronization (Engine -> Console; or Console -> Engine), and then press the SYNC button.
Quick Guide > Setting the word clock Setting the word clock The entire system must synchronize to the word clock. 1 Press the WORD CLOCK button in the SETUP screen. 2 Select the clock source. The default value is 96kHz. If the unit is operating correctly with the selected clock, the indicator for the selected clock will light blue, and the clock frequency will be displayed in the upper left of the MASTER CLOCK SELECT field.
Quick Guide > Assigning channels to the TWINLANe network Assigning channels to the TWINLANe network This section describes how to select channels from the DSP engine and I/O rack that will be output to the TWINLANe network, and to make settings to reserve the network bandwidth. 1 Press the SYSTEM CONFIG button in the SETUP screen.
Quick Guide > Assigning channels to the TWINLANe network 2 Press the DSP button on the HY SLOT1 tab. The DSP popup window will appear. 3 Press a desired channel assign popup button. In this case, select STEREO. The TWINLANe CONFIGURATION popup window appears.
Quick Guide > Assigning channels to the TWINLANe network 4 Turn on the desired channel select buttons. In this case, select STA L and STA R. 5 To close the TWINLANe CONFIGURATION popup window, press the CLOSE button. You will return to the SYSTEM CONFIG [DSP] popup window. 6 If you turn on different channel select buttons, press the APPLY button. The setting for the outpout from the DSP engine to the TWINLANe network is applied. 7 8 When a confirmation screen appears, press the OK button.
Quick Guide > Assigning channels to the TWINLANe network 9 Select an I/O rack. Press an I/O rack select button (in this case the M1 button). The I/O rack settings popup window will appear. 10 Press desired channel assign popup buttons to assign channels to the TWINLANe network. In this case, select RY card slot 1.
Quick Guide > Assigning channels to the TWINLANe network 11 Press the APPLY button. The setting for the output from the I/O rack to the TWINLANe network is applied. 12 When a confirmation screen appears, press the OK button.
Quick Guide > Patching the input ports Patching the input ports Follow the steps below to patch an input channel to the input port to which the microphone was connected as described in the “Connecting the devices” section. NOTE The PATCH screen displays the input and output ports assigned to the TWINLANe network. 1 Press the PATCH button on the menu bar in the touch screen. The PATCH screen will appear. 2 Press the INPUT tab. 3 Use the knob in the upper right to display the desired input port.
Quick Guide > Patching the input ports 5 Press the desired grid cell to patch a desired channel. In this example, press the grid cell in which the input port (M1/RY SLOT1/1) and input channel (CH 1) intersect.
Quick Guide > Patching the output ports Patching the output ports Follow the steps below to patch output channels to the output ports to which the speaker system was connected as described in the “Connecting the devices” section. NOTE The PATCH screen displays the input and output ports assigned to the TWINLANe network. 1 Press the PATCH button on the menu bar in the touch screen. The PATCH screen will appear. 2 Press the OUTPUT tab.
Quick Guide > Patching the output ports 5 Press the desired grid cell to patch a desired channel. In this example, press the grid cells in which the output ports (M1/RY SLOT2/1,2) and output channels (ST A L, R) intersect.
Quick Guide > Specifying the analog gain for the HA (head amp) Specifying the analog gain for the HA (head amp) Follow the steps below to adjust the analog gain for the HA (head amp) which was patched to the input channel as described in the “Patching the input ports” section. 1 In the channel strip section on the top panel, press the [SEL] key for the channel that corresponds to the input jack (to which the microphone is connected).
Quick Guide > Routing a signal to the STEREO bus Routing a signal to the STEREO bus Follow the steps below to route the input channel signals to the STEREO bus. 1 In the channel strip section on the top panel, press the [SEL] key for the target input channel. 2 Make sure that the TO ST [A] key in the Selected Channel section is turned on. If the TO ST [A] key is turned off (its LED is off), press the key to turn it on (the LED lights up).
Quick Guide > Routing a signal to the STEREO bus 5 Raise the master fader for the STEREO A channel up to 0 dB.
Quick Guide > Routing a signal to the STEREO bus 6 Raise the input channel fader to the appropriate volume level. At this point, you should be able to hear sound from the speaker system (that is patched to the STEREO A channel). If no sound is heard, check to see whether the meters are moving in the METER screen. If the input meters are not moving Make sure that signals are being input correctly to the patched input channels.
Quick Guide > Routing a signal to the STEREO bus 7 To adjust the balance of the signal routed from the input channels to the STEREO bus, rotate the [PAN/BAL] knob in the Selected Channel section.
Network and Connections > About the TWINLANe Network Network and Connections About the TWINLANe Network TWINLANe is a proprietary Yamaha network protocol for transferring multiple channels of digital audio and control signals simultaneously over a single cable. TWINLANe allows low-latency transfer of up to 400 audio channels, and enables sharing between all devices on the network. Input signals can also be shared between multiple DSP engines.
Network and Connections > Connecting a TWINLANe network card Connecting a TWINLANe network card The TWINLANe network card can be used with the RIVAGE PM series.
Network and Connections > Connecting a TWINLANe network card OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN 400 ch Even if a cable is severed at one point, the signal will be re-routed automatically and communication will continue without interruption. In RIVAGE PM system version 2 and later, you can make settings for two TWINLANe networks (MAIN and SUB).
Network and Connections > Signal flow within the RPio Signal flow within the RPio The following diagram shows the signal flow within the RPio. ■Mode 1 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 128 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 128 113-128 17-32 1-16 HY SLOT 2 OUT MY SLOT 2 OUT MY SLOT 1 OUT RY SLOT 6 OUT RY SLOT 5 OUT RY SLOT 4 OUT RY SLOT 3 OUT RY SLOT 2 OUT RY SLOT 1 OUT HY SLOT 2 IN MY SLOT 2 IN MY SLOT 1 IN RY SLOT 6 IN RY SLOT 5 IN RY SLOT 4 IN RY SLOT 3 IN RY SLOT 2 IN RY SLOT 1 IN ...
Network and Connections > Signal flow within the RPio 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 128 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 128 HY SLOT 2 OUT MY SLOT 2 OUT MY SLOT 1 OUT RY SLOT 6 OUT RY SLOT 5 OUT RY SLOT 4 OUT RY SLOT 3 OUT RY SLOT 2 OUT RY SLOT 1 OUT HY SLOT 2 IN MY SLOT 2 IN MY SLOT 1 IN RY SLOT 6 IN RY SLOT 5 IN RY SLOT 4 IN RY SLOT 3 IN RY SLOT 2 IN RY SLOT 1 IN *1 *2 HY SLOT 1 IN (256 ch max.) HY SLOT 1 OUT (256 ch max.
Network and Connections > About Connections About Connections The diagram below shows typical connections for the RIVAGE PM series. Equipment can be combined in various ways to construct small systems or large systems. • Connecting the control surface and DSP engine (Console Network) A DSP engine has a dedicated connector (TO CONSOLE) for connection to the control surface. A network created by the control surface and a DSP engine is called a “Console Network.” The Console Network is connected as a ring.
Network and Connections > About Connections I/O Rack 2 HY1 HY2 RY card MY card RY card MY card MY card RY card I/O Rack HY1 2 I/O Rack Split Out Additional Input HY2 I/O Rack HY1 2 HY2 I/O Rack Split Out Additional Input I/O Rack Split Out Additional Input TWINLANe Network Additional Input/Output Multitrack (DAW) Input/Output Multitrack (DAW) Input/Output 1 HY1 HY2 HY3 HY4 MY card MY card 1 Additional Input/Output DSP Engine Console Network or HY1 HY2 HY3 HY4 DSP Engine C
Network and Connections > About Connections RPio M1 RPio M2 RPio M7 RPio M8 TWINLANe (Main) HY1 HY2 HY1 DSP1A DSP1B HY1 DSP4A HY2 HY2 Console2 Console1 HY1 Console1 HY2 DSP4B Console2 TWINLANe (Sub) RPio S1 RPio S2 RPio S7 RPio S8 The ID settings of components are shown below.
Network and Connections > About Dual Console About Dual Console The system can be configured with two control surfaces connected to the DSP engine(s). The two control surfaces (the main CS-R10 and the sub CS-R10-S) can be placed side by side to expand the number of faders, or can be used by two operators in the FOH position of audience seating and in a sound booth. It is also possible to add a single CS-R10 or CS-R10-S unit to the CSD-R7.
Network and Connections > TWINLANe mirroring TWINLANe mirroring In a mirroring configuration, the DSP engine that is performing the system’s audio processing is said to be in the “active” state, and the DSP engine that is waiting as a backup is said to be in the “standby” state. When starting up in a mirroring configuration, the default is that A starts in the active state and B starts in the standby state.
Network and Connections > TWINLANe mirroring ** [ERR T13] MULTI MASTERS PRESS [ENTER] ** Unit ID Press the [ENTER] key. Press [ENTER] TO WORD CLOCK SLAVE Press the [ENTER] key.
Network and Connections > About DSP mirroring About DSP mirroring The system can be configured with two DSP engines as a set, providing resilience against unexpected software failures or hardware malfunctions that would not be addressed by the redundant power supplies of the units or by TWINLANe cable redundancy. There are two types of DSP mirroring: TWINLANe MIRRORING configured in the TWINLANe network and PARAMETER MIRRORING configured in the Dante audio network.
Network and Connections > About DSP mirroring 4 Use the [▲]/[▼] keys to select the DSP engine to be mirrored. NOTE If the Unit ID of the DSP engine does not support mirroring, the Unit IDs that can be set (1A, 1B, etc.) will not be displayed. 5 6 Press the [ENTER] key. 7 8 Press the [ENTER] key. Use the [▲]/[▼] keys to select the desired mirroring mode. The DSP engine will restart. The Mirroring mode is displayed in the indicator of the SYSTEM popup window.
Network and Connections > About DSP mirroring The Mirroring mode is displayed at the bottom of the DSP engine LCD screen.
Network and Connections > Parameter mirroring Parameter mirroring In parameter mirroring, only parameters are synchronized between two DSP engines, and you need to switch the active DSP engine between DSP A and DSP B manually. Unlike TWINLANe mirroring, input and output patches will not switch over automatically if DSP engines are switched between active and standby states. So, you need to make settings so they will switch over.
Network and Connections > Verifying the DSP mirroring operation Verifying the DSP mirroring operation This verification function is available only while two DSP engines are in mirroring status. The function involves virtual stoppage of the DSP engine operation. Use this function to verify the system during the setup process.
Network and Connections > About Dante About Dante Dante is a network audio protocol developed by Audinate. It is designed to deliver multi-channel audio signals at various sampling and bit rates, as well as device control signals over a Giga-bit Ethernet (GbE) network. Visit the Audinate website for more details on Dante. http://www.audinate.com/ More information on Dante is also posted on the Yamaha Pro Audio website: http://www.yamahaproaudio.
Network and Connections > Connecting to a Dante network Connecting to a Dante network There are two ways to connect this product model to a Dante network. For more information on how to connect and set up Dante devices, refer to the “Dante audio network settings” (p.299) section. NOTE A daisy chain connection is used to connect fewer simple devices. If you want to connect several devices, a star topology is recommended.
Network and Connections > DSP mirroring function in the Dante audio network DSP mirroring function in the Dante audio network If the active DSP engine fails over, the stand-by DSP engine will take over all I/O patches for the TWINLANe network, and the audio will continue without interruption. However, patches for the Dante audio network will not switch over automatically. So, you need to make settings so they will switch over.
Network and Connections > Word clock in the RIVAGE PM series Word clock in the RIVAGE PM series On a TWINLANe network, only one DSP engine is the master for one network. If two or more DSP engines exist on a single network, one is the master and the other units are slaves. For the master clock on a TWINLANe network, you can select either the DSP engine’s internal clock (44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.
Network and Connections > About the sampling rate converter (SRC) About the sampling rate converter (SRC) SRC is built into all input and output channels (one SRC for every two channels) of the AES/EBU jacks on the rear panel of the control surface and of the RY16-AE. This allows digital signals that are not synchronized to the RIVAGE PM series to be input and output. SRC block diagram SRC block diagram AUDIO: CLOCK: INPUT DSP ENGINE INPUT SRC INPUT* INTERNAL Extracting clock INT 44.
Network and Connections > About connecting a computer About connecting a computer You can connect a computer with PM Editor installed to a DSP engine. To do so, connect the computer to the NETWORK connector [PC] located next to the TO CONSOLE connector. Do not connect it to the NETWORK connector located above the HY card slots. Alternatively, you can use the NETWORK connector on the control surface.
Bay > About bays Bay About bays A bay consists of a group of 12 faders located across the Touch Screen section and the Channel Strip section. The CS-R10 and CSD-R7 have three bays; the CS-R10-S has two bays. You can operate these bays independently. Therefore, you can perform mixing operations, such as recalling settings to the touch screen or switching between 12-fader layers on a bay, without affecting the settings on other bays.
Bay > Faders and fader layers Faders and fader layers Selecting a layer Twelve faders are arranged into layers, as illustrated below. You can use the Layer Select keys to the right of the faders to recall the channels to edit. There are two layer types: base layer and custom layer. Base layer A base layer features mixer channels lined up in the fixed order of channels. Input [1-12], [13-24] ... [277-288]: total 24 layers Mix [1-12], [13-24] ... [61-72]: total 6 layers Matrix [1-12], [13-24] ...
Bay > Faders and fader layers a INPUT [1-72]/[73-144] keys Enable you to select an input layer. NOTE Press the INPUT [1-72] key and INPUT [73-144] key simultaneously to select the INPUT 145-288 channel layer. Press these two keys simultaneously again to select the INPUT 1-144 layer. b OUTPUT [MIX]/[MATRIX] keys Enable you to select an output layer. c [DCA] key Enables you to select a DCA layer. d CUSTOM [1]/[2] keys Enable you to select a custom layer.
Bay > Faders and fader layers e Layer display Indicates the selected layer. f Layer Select [A]/[B]/[C]/[D]/[E]/[F] keys Enable you to select a layer. Different layers are recalled to the faders depending on the combination of the keys, as shown in the table below: (Please refer to the Note regarding the INPUT [1-72]/[73-144] keys.
Bay > Faders and fader layers b [MIX]/[MATRIX] keys Enable you to select an output layer. c [DCA] key Enables you to select a DCA bank. d [CUSTOM] key Turns Custom mode on or off. Use the INPUT [1], [2], [MIX], [MATRIX], and [DCA] keys to select a Custom bank. The bank numbers (1–5) are labeled adjacent to these keys. e Layer displays Indicates the name of the layer selected via the Layer select keys (see u on page 18). f Layer Select [A]/[B]/[C]/[D]/[E]/[F] keys Enable you to select a layer.
Bay > Selected channel concepts Selected channel concepts The RIVAGE PM series enables you to select a specific channel to control or for which to display mixing parameters. Types of selected channels The CS-R10 control surface enables you to select specific “independent” channels. This feature enables you to control multiple channels on a single control surface. Selecting a channel by using hardware You can select a specific channel for the Selected Channel section (hardware).
Bay > Selected channel concepts 1 a Press either side (+/– buttons) of the selected channel indication in the upper-left of the screen. Press the left side (–) of the selected channel indication to select the preceding channel. Press the right side (+) of the area to select the next channel. b Press the channel name area located at the bottom of the screen. Press the channel name repeatedly to switch the selected channel on screen.
Bay > Selected channel concepts On-screen selected channel (L) On-screen selected channel (C) On-screen selected channel displayed on an external monitor The on-screen selected channel on an external monitor screen also serves as the on-screen selected channel for bay R. In this way, if you use the external display and a USB mouse, you will be able to operate channel parameters on bay R in same way you do on bay L and bay C.
Bay > Selected channel concepts On-screen selected channel (L) On-screen selected channel (C) For more information on the buttons, refer to SURFACE SETTINGS 1.
Bay > Bay Link Bay Link A Bay Link function enables you to select and link layers from multiple bays on the control surface. Normally, each bay with 12 faders operates independently. However, using this function, you can link and use multiple bays as one bay that features up to 36 faders.
Bay > Bay Link 1 Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen. 2 Press the PREFERENCES button to access the PREFERENCES popup window. This screen includes several pages, which you can switch between using the tabs located at the top of the screen.
Bay > Bay Link 3 Press the SURFACE SETTINGS1 tab to access the SURFACE SETTINGS1 page.
Bay > Bay Link Separate... This option is another simple setting. You can select a different channel for each bay. Up to three channels can be viewed and controlled simultaneously. L Separate... This option is suitable for two operators. For example, operations on bay (L) will not interfere with the operations on bay (C&R).
Bay > Bay Link LC BayLink... Bay L and bay (C) will be linked with each other, providing a bank of 24 faders. For more information on the settings, refer to the SURFACE SETTING1 screenof the Preferences Settings. The selected layer will be indicated by a bold white frame in the meter area. Also, the layer of the linked bay will be indicated by a thin white frame.
Bay > Bay Link NOTE ( ( ( Changing the Bay Link setting will clear the position of the selected channel stored in each layer. Once this position data is cleared, the selected channel (which was already selected at the time of layer switching) will move to the left-most channel in the fader bank. (Please note that this applies only when FADER BANK SEL LINK is turned on.) If Bay Link mode is changed while DCA channels are being rolled out, the DCA roll-out operation will be canceled.
System Setup > About the SETUP screen System Setup About the SETUP screen The SETUP screen enables you to set various parameters that apply to the entire RIVAGE PM series. Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen.
System Setup > SYSTEM SETUP field (SETUP screen) SYSTEM SETUP field (SETUP screen) This field enables you to make various settings that globally apply to the control surface. 6 1 2 3 4 5 7 ) ! @ # $ 8 9 % ^ C & a * ( B A SYSTEM CONFIG popup button Press this button to access the “HY SLOT popup window (Online)” (p.250), in which you can configure the TWINLANe network and set up the components that comprise the RIVAGE PM series.
System Setup > SYSTEM SETUP field (SETUP screen) g MIDI/GPI [CS] popup button, MIDI/GPI [DSP] popup button Press this button to access the MIDI/GPI popup window (see page 373), in which you can make MIDI and GPI settings.
System Setup > USER SETUP field (SETUP screen) USER SETUP field (SETUP screen) This field enables you to make various user-related settings. 6 1 2 3 4 5 7 ) ! @ # $ 8 9 % ^ C & h * ( B A USER SETUP LIBRARY popup button Press this button to access the USER SETUP LIBRARY popup window, in which you can store various settings for PREFERENCES, or for the USER DEFINED keys and knobs. NOTE Please note that custom fader settings will not be stored in this window.
System Setup > FILE field (SETUP screen) FILE field (SETUP screen) This field enables you to save and load various data. 6 1 2 3 4 5 7 ) ! @ # $ 8 9 % ^ C & m * ( B A CSV EXPORT/IMPORT popup button Press this button to access the CSV FILE EXPORT/IMPORT popup window, enabling you to export or import data of the RIVAGE PM series as a CSV file that can be edited offline in a spreadsheet application.
System Setup > MAINTENANCE field (SETUP screen) MAINTENANCE field (SETUP screen) This field enables you to perform maintenance operations for the entire control surface. 6 1 2 3 4 5 7 ) ! @ # $ 8 9 % ^ C & o * ( B A MAINTENANCE popup button Press this button to access the MAINTENANCE popup window (see page 388), in which you can initialize or calibrate the RIVAGE PM series. v CONSOLE LOCK button Executes the Console Lock function.
System Setup > CONSOLE STATUS field (SETUP screen) CONSOLE STATUS field (SETUP screen) This field displays various information about the control surface.
System Setup > CONSOLE STATUS field (SETUP screen) p CONSOLE MODE button When you press a button, the CONSOLE MODE popup window appears, in which you can select the DSP engine and CONSOLE ID. When you edit the setting, a confirmation dialog box appears. When you press the OK button, the control surface restarts. Specify separate CONSOLE IDs when using the system in dual console mode. The following functions are available only for the master console (ID1), but other functions are common to both.
System Setup > PANEL SETTINGS field (SETUP screen) PANEL SETTINGS field (SETUP screen) This field enables you to set the LED brightness and contrast (see “Specifying the brightness of the touch screens, LEDs, channel name displays, and lamps” on page 398). 6 1 2 3 4 5 7 ) ! @ # $ 8 9 % ^ C & s * ( B A BANK A–D buttons Select the bank to which you want to save the brightness and contrast settings. You can save four different settings in banks A–D, and switch them if desired.
System Setup > SYSTEM CONFIG SYSTEM CONFIG In SYSTEM CONFIG you can specify the type and number of components that comprise the RIVAGE PM series, and the audio channels that are assigned to the TWINLANe network. As necessary, you can also set the internal parameters of each component. You can also view and set the overall operating state of the entire system. SYSTEM CONFIG allows you to make settings offline if you are setting up in a location where the actual devices are not yet connected.
System Setup > SYSTEM CONFIG Online settings SYSTEM CONFIG Online settings The procedure for making online settings is described below. 1 2 3 4 5 “Synchronizing the settings data between components” (p.240) “Selecting and setting up the components” (p.242) Assigning channels to the TWINLANe network “Editing the internal parameters of each component” (p.260) “Dante audio network settings” (p.
System Setup > Synchronizing the settings data between components Synchronizing the settings data between components About the need for synchronization About the need for synchronization I/O rack Control surface Mixing data DSP engine Mixing data I/O rack HA gain Gain compensation settings etc. The control surface and DSP engine each maintain mixing data, and synchronize this data via the network.
System Setup > DEVICE SYNC screen DEVICE SYNC screen 1 This screen contains the following items. a Sync direction buttons Press one of these buttons to specify the direction of data synchronization collectively. b CLEAR ALL button Press this button to clear the direction of data synchronization setting.
System Setup > Selecting and setting up the components Selecting and setting up the components Follow the steps below to set up the components for the RIVAGE PM series system by selecting DSP engines and making settings for the HY slot and Y slot. 1 2 Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen. Press the SYSTEM CONFIG button. The SYSTEM popup window appears. 3 Make sure that the proper DSP engines have been selected for connection.
System Setup > SYSTEM popup window SYSTEM popup window 1 3 5 8 4 6 9 7 ) 2 1 2 This screen contains the following items. a CONSOLE SELECT popup button Press the button to open the CONSOLE SELECT popup window, in which you can select the control surface to mount. b CS1 popup button, CS2 popup button Press this button to access the SYSTEM CONFIG [CS1] or SYSTEM CONFIG [CS2] popup window, in which you can make input/output and MY slot settings for the control surface.
System Setup > SYSTEM popup window d DSP popup button Press this button to access the SYSTEM CONFIG [DSP] popup window, in which you can assign the DSP engine’s MIX channels, MATRIX channels, and direct outputs to the TWINLANe network, and make settings for the HY slots and MY slots. In the case of a DSP engine that is the word clock master for any TWINLANe network (Main, Sub, or Console), an indicator is shown above this button.
System Setup > SYSTEM popup window g Status of the HY SLOTs Displays the status of the network and devices connected to the card mounted in the HY slot. ( TWINLANe network card: This section indicates the power status of the optical receiver for communication. ( Dante network card: This section indicates the communication status of the Dante network. If there is no problem with Dante communication, the status will be displayed in green. If there is a problem, view the “Dante messages” (p.305).
System Setup > HY slot popup window HY slot popup window 1 4 2 3 2 4 1 This screen contains the following items. a I/O rack select popup buttons (M1–M8, S1–S8) These buttons represent the I/O racks that are connected to the system. When you press one of these buttons, a popup window appears, allowing you to select an I/O rack (on the CSD-R7, only M1–M8). The row at the top of the button shows the icon of the device and the power supply status of POWER A and B (green: power on, red: power off).
System Setup > HY slot popup window c DSP popup button Press this button to access the SYSTEM CONFIG [DSP] popup window, in which you can assign the DSP engine’s MIX channels, MATRIX channels, and direct outputs to the TWINLANe network, and make settings for the HY slots and MY slots. In the case of a DSP engine that is the word clock master for any TWINLANe network (Main, Sub, or Console), an indicator is shown above this button.
System Setup > Assigning the channels (that will be used by the I/O racks) to the TWINLANe network Assigning the channels (that will be used by the I/O racks) to the TWINLANe network The following procedure explains how to assign the channels used by the I/O racks to the TWINLANe network. Only the input signals via the RY16-ML-SILK, RY16-AE, or MY card should be assigned to channels. You do not need to assign signals output from the TWINLANe network.
System Setup > Assigning the channels (that will be used by the I/O racks) to the TWINLANe network 7 When you finish making assignments, press the × button to close the I/O rack settings popup window. If channels are assigned, and you press the × button without pressing the APPLY button, the following confirmation screen will appear. If you press OK, you will return to the HY slot popup window without applying the assignments. If you press CANCEL, you will return to the I/O rack settings popup window.
System Setup > HY SLOT popup window (Online) HY SLOT popup window (Online) 1 4 2 3 2 4 1 This screen contains the following items. a I/O rack select popup buttons (M1–M8, S1–S8) These buttons represent the I/O racks that are connected to the system. When you press one of these buttons, a popup window appears, allowing you to select an I/O rack (on the CSD-R7, only M1–M8).
System Setup > HY SLOT popup window (Online) c DSP popup button Press this button to access the SYSTEM CONFIG [DSP] popup window, in which you can assign the DSP engine’s MIX channels, MATRIX channels, and direct outputs to the TWINLANe network, and make settings for the HY slots and MY slots. In the case of a DSP engine that is the word clock master for any TWINLANe network (Main, Sub, or Console), an indicator is shown above this button.
System Setup > I/O rack settings popup window I/O rack settings popup window This screen contains the following items. a I/O rack select popup buttons These buttons represent the I/O racks that are connected to the system. Press one of these buttons to access a popup window, in which you can select an I/O rack. The row at the top of the button shows the power supply status of POWER A and B (green: power on, red: power off).
System Setup > I/O rack settings popup window i TWINLANe assign buttons When you press a button, the number of channels used by the selected slot will be assigned to TWINLANe (or the assignment will be canceled). For an HY slot, a window in which you can make settings in 16-channel units will appear. NOTE Bandwidth for an I/O rack can be assigned to the TWINLANe network only for the DSP engine that is the word clock master of the system. If the assignment is unavailable, the button will be disabled.
System Setup > Assign the channels that will be used by the DSP engines to the TWINLANe network Assign the channels that will be used by the DSP engines to the TWINLANe network The following procedure explains how to assign the channels used by the DSP engines to the TWINLANe network. A maximum of 400 channels can be assigned on the TWINLANe network. A TWINLANe network card features 256-in/256-out. For a DSP engine 1 2 Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen.
System Setup > DSP popup window DSP popup window 4 1 3 7 8 5 7 8 6 9 ) 2 This screen contains the following items. a DSP engine indicator This button represents the DSP engine that is connected to the system. The row at the top of the button shows the power supply status of POWER A and B (green: power on, red: power off). The device icon indicates the device status (green: normal; yellow: abnormal, red: critical error).
System Setup > DSP popup window e SLOT OUT channel assignment This area indicates the number of output channels currently used by the TWINLANe network. f SLOT IN channel assignment This area indicates the number of input channels currently used by the TWINLANe network. g TWINLANe resource section Indicates the total number of channels currently used by the TWINLANe network. - SLOT OUT resource counter: The maximum number of channels is 256.
System Setup > TWINLANe CONFIGURATION popup window TWINLANe CONFIGURATION popup window 1 2 3 4 5 This screen contains the following items. a Tabs Switch between MIX OUT, ST/MT/MON/CUE/TB, DIRECT OUT 1-72, and DIRECT OUT 73-144. b Channel select buttons Select the channel to edit. The select button will change as follows. Currently not assigned to the TWINLANe network Currently assigned to the TWINLANe network Currently assigned to the TWINLANe network, and selected for cancellation.
System Setup > TWINLANe CONFIGURATION popup window e REVERT button Press this button to revert the selections for cancellation and assignments to their original status collectively.
System Setup > SYSTEM CONFIG [CS1] popup window SYSTEM CONFIG [CS1] popup window 4 3 1 2 This screen contains the following items. a Parameter settings popup buttons Press a button to open a popup window, in which you can set the parameters of each card. b MY SLOT (1–2) popup buttons Press a button to open the MY CARD SELECT popup window, in which you can select a Mini-YGDAI card. c HIGH Fs FORMAT select button When a Mini-YGDAI card is using high sampling (88.
System Setup > Editing the internal parameters of each component Editing the internal parameters of each component You can edit the internal parameters of each component 1 Press a parameter settings popup button to access the parameter settings popup window of each component. 2 Edit the parameters as needed.
System Setup > Editing the internal parameters of the RY16-ML-SILK Editing the internal parameters of the RY16-ML-SILK % 1 2 4 5 3 6 8 7 9 ) ! @ # $ This screen contains the following items. a Patch indication Indicates the channel that is patched. b +48V button Switches phantom power (+48V) on or off. c A.GAIN knob Indicates the HA analog gain setting. Use the screen encoder to adjust the value.
System Setup > Editing the internal parameters of the RY16-ML-SILK h SILK ON button Switches Silk on or off. i RED/BLUE selection button Toggles between BLUE and RED: “BLUE” for solidity and power, and “RED” for sparkling energy. j SILK [TEXTURE] knob Adjusts the TEXTURE parameter of Silk. k HPF button Toggles the high pass filter on or off for each port. NOTE This is a parameter within the I/O rack. It is different than the HPF within the channel module of the control surface.
System Setup > Editing the internal parameters for OMNI OUT of the RY16-DA and control surface Editing the internal parameters for OMNI OUT of the RY16-DA and control surface 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 This screen contains the following items. a Patch indication Indicates the channel that is patched. b DELAY button Switches the output delay on or off. c Delay time knob Sets the delay time of the output port. If you press this knob when it is selected, the DELAY TIME popup window will appear.
System Setup > Editing the internal parameters for OMNI OUT of the RY16-DA and control surface g Tabs Switch the display in units of eight channels.
System Setup > Editing the internal parameters for INPUT 1-8/INPUT 9-16 of the RY16-AE, and AES/EBU INPUT 1-8 on the rear panel of the control surface Editing the internal parameters for INPUT 1-8/INPUT 9-16 of the RY16-AE, and AES/EBU INPUT 1-8 on the rear panel of the control surface 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 This screen contains the following items. a Patch indication Indicates the channel that is patched. b Level meter Shows the input level.
System Setup > Editing the internal parameters for INPUT 1-8/INPUT 9-16 of the RY16-AE, and AES/EBU INPUT 1-8 on the rear panel of the control surface g S-GAIN knob Adjusts the side gain of M/S. h Tabs Switch the display in units of eight channels.
System Setup > Editing the internal parameters for OUTPUT 1-8/OUTPUT 9-16 of the RY16-AE, and AES/EBU OUTPUT 1-8 on the rear panel of the control surface Editing the internal parameters for OUTPUT 1-8/OUTPUT 9-16 of the RY16-AE, and AES/EBU OUTPUT 1-8 on the rear panel of the control surface 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 This screen contains the following items. a Patch indication Indicates the channel that is patched. b DELAY button Switches the output delay on or off.
System Setup > Editing the internal parameters for OUTPUT 1-8/OUTPUT 9-16 of the RY16-AE, and AES/EBU OUTPUT 1-8 on the rear panel of the control surface f Sampling rate select menu Selects the output sampling rate when an SRC is turned on. Choose from SAME AS INPUT (same as the word clock that is input), 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, or 96 kHz. g GAIN knob Adjusts the output gain of the output port. Use the screen encoder to adjust the value. Adjust the setting in 1.
System Setup > Editing the internal parameters of the MY CARD INPUT Editing the internal parameters of the MY CARD INPUT 6 1 2 3 4 5 This screen contains the following items. a Patch indication Indicates the channel that is patched. b Level meter Shows the input level. c SRC button Switches the sampling rate converter on/off for each pair of channels. NOTE This setting will be ignored if you try to specify it for an MY card that does not support RC.
System Setup > Editing the internal parameters of the MY CARD OUTPUT Editing the internal parameters of the MY CARD OUTPUT 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 This screen contains the following items. a Patch indication Indicates the channel that is patched. b DELAY button Switches the output delay on or off. c Delay time knob Sets the delay time of the output port. If you press this knob when it is selected, the DELAY TIME popup window will appear.
System Setup > Editing the internal parameters of the MY CARD OUTPUT g Tabs Switch the display in units of eight channels.
System Setup > Editing the internal parameters for OMNI IN of the control surface Editing the internal parameters for OMNI IN of the control surface 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ) ! This screen contains the following items. a Patch indication Indicates the channel that is patched. b +48V button Switches phantom power (+48V) on or off. c A.GAIN knob Indicates the HA analog gain setting. Use the screen encoder to adjust the value.
System Setup > Editing the internal parameters for OMNI IN of the control surface h HPF button Toggles the high pass filter on or off for each port. NOTE This is a parameter within the I/O rack. It is different than the HPF within the channel module of the control surface. i FREQUENCY knob Sets the HPF cutoff frequency. j M/S button Switches the M/S decoder on or off for each pair of channels. k S-GAIN knob Adjusts the side gain of M/S.
System Setup > Settings for the HY128-MD card Settings for the HY128-MD card 1 2 3 4 5 ) ! 6 7 8 9 @ # This illustration shows the screen that appears when the HY128-MD card is mounted in HY SLOT3. This screen contains the following items.
System Setup > Settings for the HY128-MD card a REDUNDANCY MODE Select one of the following two redundant pairs: ・ MODE 1 A combination of an optical connection and coaxial connection is used to maintain redundancy. ・ MODE 2 Two optical connections or two coaxial connections are used to maintain redundancy. b INPUT PRIORITY Specifies which input signal from two redundant lines will take priority. • PRI1 With MODE 1, OPTICAL 1 and OPTICAL 2 signals will take priority.
System Setup > Settings for the HY128-MD card d INPUT SRC button Selects SRC on or off for the MADI input signal. e SRC CLOCK button Selects the clock for the input signal while SRC is on. • MADI IN MADI IN clock is regarded as the SRC input clock. • WCLK IN WCLK IN FOR SRC clock is regarded as the SRC input clock. f Fs indicators Display whether the input signal is 48kHz or 44.1kHz. If there is no valid MADI input, the indicators will turn off.
System Setup > Settings for the HY128-MD card m OUTPUT CHANNEL FORMAT buttons Select the channel format of the output signal. • SAME AS INPUT The same number of channels as that of MADI IN will be output. If there is no valid MADI input, 64-channel signals will be output. • 64 64-Channel output • 56 56-Channel output ■ About the SOFTWARE CONTROL switches on the HY128-MD card When switch 1 is ON (default), you can view and edit the settings on the control surface.
System Setup > SYSTEM CONFIG Offline settings SYSTEM CONFIG Offline settings You can make system settings using the control surface by itself, without connecting a DSP engine or I/O rack. The procedure for offline settings is described below. 1 2 3 4 5 “Mounting an I/O rack (offline)” (p.279) “Specifying the type and number of cards (Offline)” (p.282) Assigning channels to the TWINLANe network “Editing the internal parameters of each component” (p.260) “Dante audio network settings” (p.
System Setup > Mounting an I/O rack (offline) Mounting an I/O rack (offline) The following procedure explains how to assign the channels used by the I/O racks and DSP engines to the TWINLANe network. 1 Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen. 2 Press the SYSTEM CONFIG button. The “SYSTEM CONFIG popup window (Offline)” (p.281) appears.
System Setup > Mounting an I/O rack (offline) 3 Press the I/O rack select popup button to access the I/O SELECT popup window. 4 Select the I/O rack (RPio622 or RPio222) that you want to use, and press the OK button. You will return to the SYSTEM CONFIG popup window. To cancel, press the CANCEL button. If you want to add another I/O rack, repeat steps 3–4.
System Setup > SYSTEM CONFIG popup window (Offline) SYSTEM CONFIG popup window (Offline) 1 1 This screen contains the following items. a I/O rack select popup buttons (M1–M8, S1–S8) If you press one of these buttons when an I/O rack is not mounted, the I/O SELECT popup window will appear, allowing you to select the I/O rack that you want to use. If you press this button when an I/O rack is already mounted, the “I/O rack settings popup window” (p.252) will appear.
System Setup > Specifying the type and number of cards (Offline) Specifying the type and number of cards (Offline) The following example explains how to add an RY card for use in the I/O rack. Use the same procedure for adding a different card to a different component. 1 2 3 Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen. Press the SYSTEM CONFIG button to access the SYSTEM CONFIG popup window.
System Setup > I/O rack settings popup window I/O rack settings popup window 3 1 # 6 2 4 5 ) 7 7 8 ! 9 @ This screen contains the following items. a I/O rack select popup buttons These buttons represent the I/O racks that are connected to the system. Press one of these buttons to access a popup window, in which you can select an I/O rack. The row at the top of the button shows the power supply status of POWER A and B (green: power on, red: power off).
System Setup > I/O rack settings popup window f HIGH Fs FORMAT select buttons When a Mini-YGDAI card is using high sampling (88.2 kHz, 96 kHz), these buttons enable you to select the operating mode as DOUBLE SPEED, DOUBLE CHANNEL, or SINGLE for IN and OUT respectively. NOTE This setting will be ignored if you try to specify a mode that the MY card does not support. g WITH RECALL button Turn this button on to apply the scene data to the HA device and output patches when a scene is recalled.
System Setup > I/O rack settings popup window This window enables you to switch the routing mode for HY slot 2. MODE 1: All input signals of the RY slots and MY slots are split for output to the HY SLOT 2 output. MODE 2: You can patch mixing output signals to the HY SLOT 2 output via the TWINLANe network, in the same way as the RY slots and MY slots.
System Setup > RY CARD SELECT popup window RY CARD SELECT popup window 1 This screen contains the following items. a RY card select buttons Select the RY card that you want to use. b BLANK button Use this button if you do not want to mount anything.
System Setup > MY CARD SELECT popup window MY CARD SELECT popup window 3 1 This screen contains the following items. a Mini-YGDAI card select buttons Select the Mini-YGDAI card that you want to use. b BLANK button Use this button if you do not want to mount anything. c Tabs Switch between pages in the list of Mini-YGDAI cards.
System Setup > HY CARD SELECT popup window HY CARD SELECT popup window 1 This screen contains the following items. a HY card select buttons Select the HY card that you want to use. b BLANK button Use this button if you do not want to mount anything.
System Setup > DELAY COMPENSATION DELAY COMPENSATION Each channel signal may be delayed by a different amount of time due to digital signal processing through plug-ins, GEQ inserts, or certain routings. The Delay Compensation function automatically fixes this delayed timing. The maximum delay is estimated, and the appropriate amount of delay is added to each channel as compensation.
System Setup > DELAY COMPENSATION popup window DELAY COMPENSATION popup window 1 2 3 This screen contains the following items. NOTE By default, only the INPUT INSERTS button is turned on. a INPUT INSERTS COMPENSATE button Press this button to automatically compensate for the timing among channels by inserting a delay into each input channel. Due to this compensation, all input channel signals will be delayed by 112 samples.
System Setup > DELAY COMPENSATION popup window sample fs 44.1 kHz fs 48kHz fs 88.2kHz fs 96kHz 336 7.60msec 7.00msec 3.80msec 3.50msec 336+7 7.80msec 7.10msec 3.90msec 3.60msec 336+14 7.90msec 7.30msec 4.00msec 3.60msec d Latency values This area shows the latency values (msec) generated by the signal that is input to the DSP engine, passes through the input channel, and is output to the buses. A latency value increases as Delay Compensation is applied.
System Setup > Word Clock Word Clock A TWINLANe network that features the RIVAGE PM series transfers not only audio and control signals, but also word clock. On a TWINLANe network, only one DSP engine can become the clock master. If two DSP engines are on the same network, one becomes the master and the other becomes a slave. For the master clock on a TWINLANe network, you can select one of the following three options: the DSP engine’s internal clock (44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.
System Setup > WORD CLOCK popup window (Master mode) WORD CLOCK popup window (Master mode) 1 2 3 4 This screen contains the following items. MASTER CLOCK SELECT field a Master clock frequency display Indicates the frequency (44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, or 96 kHz) of the currently-selected master clock. If the unit is not syncing to the master clock, “UNLOCK” will appear.
System Setup > WORD CLOCK popup window (Master mode) b Clock status display Indicates the status of synchronization with the master clock for each clock source. Each indicator is explained below. ( LOCK (light blue) Indicates that a clock synchronized with the selected clock source is being input. If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector or slot, it indicates that a clock is being input or output properly between that device and the RIVAGE PM series.
System Setup > Network Network The RIVAGE PM series enables you to control the mixing parameters from external devices on the network using an application such as RIVAGE PM StageMix. The setting procedure is described below. 1 Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen. 2 3 Press the NETWORK button. The NETWORK popup window appears. Make network settings as needed.
System Setup > NETWORK screen: FOR MIXER CONTROL tab NETWORK screen: FOR MIXER CONTROL tab Here we will make the network settings for connecting the application that wirelessly controls the RIVAGE PM Series such as RIVAGE PM StageMix or MonitorMix. 1 4 2 3 5 6 7 This window contains the following items. The CONSOLE IP SETTING includes settings for RIVAGE PM StageMix, and the DSP ENGINE IP SETTING includes settings for MonitorMix.
System Setup > NETWORK screen: FOR MIXER CONTROL tab f SUBNET MASK button This defines the bits used for the network address that identifies the network, out of the IP addresses used in the network. Press this button to open the settings screen. g MONITOR MIX Sets the NAME and PIN used by MonitorMix. NAME is the name to confirm before connecting, and PIN (Personal Identification Number) is the number for authentication that is asked for right after connecting.
System Setup > NETWORK screen: IMMERSIVE SOUND tab NETWORK screen: IMMERSIVE SOUND tab The RIVAGE PM series corresponds to the control of the L-ACOUSTICS Immersive Sound system "L-ISA". Please consult your Yamaha dealer for more information.
System Setup > Dante audio network settings Dante audio network settings Here’s how to make Dante audio network settings for the RIVAGE PM series and the connected I/O racks. By mounting an I/O rack you can use routing and HA remote operations. 1 Press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2 3 Press the SYSTEM CONFIG button to access the SYSTEM CONFIG popup window. Press the target HY SLOT tab. The “HY SLOT window” (p.300) appears. 4 Press the DANTE SETUP popup button.
System Setup > HY SLOT window HY SLOT window 1 4 2 5 3 6 7 8 9 This window contains the following items. a HY CARD popup button Press a button to open the HY CARD SELECT popup window, in which you can select a Dante-enabled HY card. b NETWORK popup button Press this button to access the NETWORK popup window, in which you can make IP address settings. Normally, the IP address is obtained automatically, so it is not necessary to change the setting. Specify this manually as necessary.
System Setup > HY SLOT window AUTO (DHCP)... The. IP address is obtained automatically. STATIC IP ......... The IP address is specified manually. c DANTE SETUP popup button Press this button to access the DANTE SETUP popup window, in which you can make settings for Dante-enabled HY cards. d REFRESH button Press this button to update the I/O rack information in the Dante audio network to its latest state. e DEVICE RACK USAGE indication This shows the state of IO rack resource usage.
System Setup > DANTE SETUP popup window DANTE SETUP popup window 1 2 3 4 6 ) 5 7 8 9 This screen contains the following items. a STATUS indicator ( DANTE DEVICE LOCKED The indicator is lit red if the Dante Device Lock function is enabled, preventing the audio network settings of the Dante device from being changed. ( AES67 MODE The indicator is lit green if AES67 (audio network compatibility connection standard) mode is enabled.
System Setup > DANTE SETUP popup window e APPLY button If you have edited the DANTE CONTROLLER ID for SLOT setting or the SECONDARY PORT setting, the settings are applied when you press this button. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the change. f DANTE PATCH BY select buttons If the THIS CONSOLE button is selected, Dante patching can be modified from the RIVAGE PM series. If the DANTE CONTROLLER button is selected, Dante patching cannot be controlled.
System Setup > DANTE SETUP popup window SYNC TO EXTERNAL button When this is turned on, the unit will sync to the word clocks supplied from the HY slot.
System Setup > Dante messages Dante messages Errors, warnings, and certain other types of information are displayed via the Rio front panel indicators. Messages are also displayed in the Dante Controller Error Status field. Each indicator lights or flashes as described below: No call-out The indicator is off. Light The indicator remains lit steadily. Flash The indicator continues to flash. Flash x2 The indicator flashes twice cyclically. Flash x3 The indicator flashes three times cyclically.
System Setup > Dante messages [SYSNC] Indicators Flash Meaning Possible Solution The device’s DIP switches are not set correctly. Check the DIP switch settings, and set them correctly. The following errors affect the settings or the hardware. However, the device will still be usable. The green SYSTEM indicator will light, and all indicators for all I/O channels will work normally. In addition, certain errors will cause the red SYSTEM indicator to light or flash.
System Setup > Dante messages [SYSTEM] Indicators Light Light Meaning Possible Solution You changed the positions of the device setting DIP switches or rotary switch, or changed the Dante settings from Dante Controller. Therefore, the positions of the device setting DIP switches do not match the actual Dante settings. If the Device Lock setting was enabled from Dante Controller, disable the setting, or check the device setting DIP switch positions, and set them to accommodate the current situation.
System Setup > Dante messages [SYSNC] Indicators Light or flash Light or flash Light or flash Light Meaning Possible Solution A non-GbE-compatible device is connected. When transferring audio via Dante, use device that supports GbE. Flash The [SECONDARY] connector has taken Check the circuit connected to the over communications during redundant [PRIMARY] connector. network operation.
System Setup > Dante messages [SYSNC] Indicators Flash Light Meaning Possible Solution The unit is functioning correctly as the word clock master. The unit is operating as the word clock master. The unit is functioning correctly as the word clock slave. The unit is operating as the clock slave and the clock is synchronized.
System Setup > Mounting an I/O rack Mounting an I/O rack Here’s how to select a device from the multiple I/O racks on the Dante audio network, and mount that device. 1 Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen. 2 3 Press the SYSTEM CONFIG button to access the SYSTEM CONFIG popup window. Press the HY SLOT tab (for the slot in which the Dante network card is mounted) to access the HY SLOT window. NOTE On the CSD-R7, press the HY SLOT2 tab to access the HY SLOT2 screen.
System Setup > DEVICE SELECT popup window DEVICE SELECT popup window This window includes several pages, which you can switch between using the buttons located at the top of the window.
System Setup > DEVICE LIST DEVICE LIST Here’s how to select a device from a list of I/O racks on the Dante audio network, and mount that device. 3 1 2 a DEVICE LIST This shows a list of the I/O racks on the Dante audio network. From the list, select the I/O rack that you want to mount. NOTE After the MODEL information appears in blue text, press the OK button to mount the device. If you press the OK button before this indication appears, the device is not recognized as a supported device.
System Setup > SUPPORTED DEVICE SUPPORTED DEVICE 1 3 4 2 Here you can select from the supported I/O racks, and mount a device offline. a DEVICE TYPE This shows a list of the supported I/O rack types. From the list, select the type of I/O rack that you want to mount. NOTE If an identical I/O rack of the identical UNIT ID is already mounted, the OK button is disabled, and the unit cannot be mounted.
System Setup > DVS or MANUAL DVS or MANUAL 2 1 3 Here you can enter a device label for an I/O rack, and mount it offline. a DEVICE LABEL This shows the device label of the I/O rack that you entered using the keyboard. b INPUT/OUTPUT knob Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to operate this, to specify the number of inputs and outputs of the Dante audio network. c Keyboard for device label input Use this keyboard to enter a device label for the I/O rack.
System Setup > Patching an I/O rack Patching an I/O rack Here you can patch between an I/O rack connected to a Dante connector and the Dante audio network. 1 Press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2 3 Press the SYSTEM CONFIG button to access the SYSTEM CONFIG popup window. Press the HY SLOT tab (for the slot in which the Dante network card has been mounted) to access the “HY SLOT window” (p.320). NOTE On the CSD-R7, press the HY SLOT2 tab to access the HY SLOT2 screen.
System Setup > Patching an I/O rack 4 Press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button to access the INPUT tab of the DANTE PATCH popup window. Specify the patching that will be input from the I/O rack to the Dante-enabled HY card. NOTE Unrecognized devices are indicated as ETC.
System Setup > Patching an I/O rack 5 Press the OUTPUT tab to access the OUTPUT tab of the DANTE PATCH popup window. Specify the patching that will be output from the Dante-enabled HY card to the I/O rack. NOTE ( ( 6 Unrecognized devices are indicated as ETC. If a CL1/CL3/CL5/QL1/QL5/DSP-R10-HY3/CSD-R7-HY2 is mounted, the grid is grayed-out, and cannot be edited. When you finish making settings, press the x button to close the DANTE PATCH popup window.
System Setup > Remotely controlling an I/O rack Remotely controlling an I/O rack You can control an I/O rack that supports remote control and is connected to the Dante connector. Supported models are indicated by a remote control icon. Up to 24 units can be mounted per Dante network card. In addition, up to 48 units can be controlled, and a maximum of 128 channels per device can be controlled. 1 Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen.
System Setup > Remotely controlling an I/O rack 6 When you finish making settings, press the x button to close the DANTE I/O DEVICE [I/O] screen. 7 8 As necessary, make output port settings. When you finish making settings, press the x button to close the DANTE PATCH popup window.
System Setup > HY SLOT window HY SLOT window This screen contains the following items. Control status icon This indicates the control status of the device.
System Setup > HY SLOT window If this button is on, the information saved in the RIVAGE PM series unit is applied to the HA device when scene recall is performed while connected to the applicable I/O rack.
System Setup > DANTE I/O DEVICE [I/O] screen DANTE I/O DEVICE [I/O] screen 1 3 2 4 5 6 This screen contains the following items. a I/O rack button This indicates the I/O rack’s ID number and model name. Press this button to display the RACK MOUNT popup window, in which you can select an I/O rack to mount. b Display select buttons Press a button to display the corresponding I/O rack.
System Setup > DANTE I/O DEVICE [I/O] screen f REMOTE ONLY button (Rio3224-D2 and Rio1608-D2 only) If this is on, it will no longer be possible to perform HA operations from the panel of the I/O rack. Only devices for which With Recall is enabled can be turned on/off.
System Setup > BUS SETUP (Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses) BUS SETUP (Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses) This section explains how to edit the basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses, such as switching between stereo and monaural, or changing the bus type. The settings you make in the following procedure are saved as part of the scene. 1 Press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2 Press the BUS SETUP button to open the BUS SETUP popup window.
System Setup > BUS SETUP (Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses) 6 Use the BUS TYPE select buttons to select the bus type.
System Setup > BUS SETUP page BUS SETUP page 4 1 2 This screen contains the following items. a 3 1 2 3 SIGNAL TYPE switch buttons Enable you to select how signals are processed for every adjacent pair of buses. You can select either STEREO (stereo signal) or MONOx2 (monaural signal x 2). b BUS TYPE select buttons Enable you to select the bus type for every adjacent pair of buses. You can select VARI (adjustable send level), FIXED (fixed send level), or “Mix minus” (p.330).
System Setup > SEND POINT (INPUT) (Specifying the send point for each input channel) SEND POINT (INPUT) (Specifying the send point for each input channel) 1 Press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2 Press the BUS SETUP button to open the BUS SETUP popup window. This window includes several pages, which you can switch between using the tabs located at the top of the window. 3 Press the SEND POINT (INPUT) tab. The “SEND POINT page” (p.328) opens.
System Setup > SEND POINT page SEND POINT page 6 7 7 2 1 This screen contains the following items. a 3 4 5 Channel select list Enables you to select a channel. b ALL button Press this button to apply the selected send point to all channels simultaneously. If the send point is not selected for some channels in the column, “...” will appear. c PRE send point select buttons Enable you to select the send point for each channel for which PRE is turned on.
System Setup > SEND POINT page Buttons Send Point POST FADER Immediately after the fader POST ON Immediately after the [ON] key e FOLLOW setting buttons Enable you to select for each channel whether the signal sent to the MIX/MATRIX bus will follow the ON/FADER/DCA settings regardless of the send point. These buttons correspond to the following parameters.
System Setup > Mix minus Mix minus This function removes only the signal of a specified channel from the signal that is sent to the MIX/MATRIX bus. By using this, you can quickly send to a performer or announcer a monitor signal that omits only the voice of that person. You can make mix minus settings ahead of time, and then specify the OWNER channel to associate an announcer’s mic (input channel) at their location with their monitor (mix minus bus). 1 Press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
System Setup > Mix minus NOTE Even in the OWNER screen, you can hold down the [SHIFT] key and use the N-1 OWNER button to make a selection. 7 Press the OK button. The send that is sent from the selected OWNER channel is turned off.
System Setup > BUS SETUP popup window BUS SETUP popup window 1 2 This screen contains the following items. a BUS TYPE select buttons Enable you to select the bus type for every adjacent pair of buses. You can select VARI (variable send level), FIXED (fixed send level), or MIX MINUS. b N-1 OWNER button Press this to access the MIX MINUS OWNER popup window, where you can select the OWNER channel for the mix minus setting.
System Setup > MIX MINUS OWNER popup window MIX MINUS OWNER popup window This screen contains the following items. 1 This screen contains the following items. a Channel select button These buttons select the OWNER channel (the input channel that uses mix minus).
System Setup > SEND indications for a mix minus bus SEND indications for a mix minus bus OVERVIEW screen SEND field After specifying the mix minus bus By pressing the [SHIFT] key you can specify the OWNER channel. After the setting is made, it is shown in red. This will be the SEND ON/OFF button. After the setting is made, it is shown in red. For channels other than the OWNER channel, you will be able to specify the OWNER channel by pressing the [SHIFT] key.
System Setup > SURROUND SETUP (specifying surround mode) SURROUND SETUP (specifying surround mode) If you specify surround mode in BUS SETUP, you’ll be able to use 5.1 surround panning and monitoring. By using two surround buses, IS surround production also becomes easy. This allows a highly flexible monitoring environment that includes downmixing and external monitor sources. MIX buses 1–12 and MATRIX buses 1–4 are used for the two surround buses and the downmix bus.
System Setup > SURROUND SETUP (specifying surround mode) 6 Press the APPLY button. A window will be displayed, asking you to confirm the change. 7 Press the OK button.
System Setup > SURROUND SETUP screen SURROUND SETUP screen 1 2 3 4 This screen contains the following items. a Mode switching buttons These buttons switch the bus setting from stereo mode to surround mode, or from surround mode back to stereo mode. Mode settings can be recalled as a scene. b Surround output assign buttons In surround mode, these buttons assign MIX buses (MIX 1–6/MIX7–12) to surround buses.
System Setup > SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen (SURROUND) SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen (SURROUND) When the bus setting in BUS SETUP is set to surround mode, the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen will appear as follows. 1 a Surround graph The MIX popup buttons of MIX bus sends 1–12 indicate the surround positioning. When you press this, the SURROUND PAN 1CH screen will appear.
System Setup > OVERVIEW screen (SURROUND) OVERVIEW screen (SURROUND) 1 2 3 When the bus setting in BUS SETUP is set to surround mode, the OVERVIEW screen will appear as follows. a Surround graph This shows the surround positioning. When you press this, the SURROUND PAN 1CH screen will appear. b L/R⇔F/R select button This is a toggle button that switches the object to be operated. (The [SHIFT] key does the same thing.) Use the screen encoder or the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to operate this.
System Setup > SURROUND PAN 1CH screen SURROUND PAN 1CH screen When the bus setting in BUS SETUP is set to surround mode, the SURROUND PAN 1CH screen will appear as follows. (The example shows PAIR) 2 7 1 8 2 3 a 4 5 6 Surround graph This shows the surround positioning. b Assignment buttons for each bus By default, all buttons are on. Turn off buses that do not output an audio signal. c L/R knob Specifies the left/right surround positioning.
System Setup > SURROUND PAN 1CH screen h SURROUND B button Specifies whether the signal is sent to surround bus B.
System Setup > SURROUND PAN CH1-36/ CH37-72/ CH73-108/ CH109-144 screen SURROUND PAN CH1-36/ CH37-72/ CH73-108/ CH109-144 screen When the bus setting in BUS SETUP is set to surround mode, the screen will appear as follows.
System Setup > DOWNMIX screen DOWNMIX screen If surround mode is specified in BUS SETUP, the DOWNMIX page allows you to individually specify the downmix coefficients for surround buses A/B and for the surround monitor. MATRIX buses 1–4 are used for downmix (fixed). 1 3 2 a L/R buttons Specify the output destination. b Coefficient setting knobs Specify the downmix coefficients. ∑ clip is provided. c APPLY TO MONITOR buttons Copy the settings to the surround monitor downmix settings.
System Setup > SURROUND MONITOR screen SURROUND MONITOR screen If surround mode is specified in BUS SETUP, you can make SURROUND MONITOR and SURROUND CUE settings on the SURROUND MONITOR tab that appears in the MONITOR screen. 8 1 4 2 5 7 6 3 @ ) a 9 ! # SURROUND MONITOR popup button Accesses the SURROUND MONITOR SETTINGS popup window, in which you can make detailed settings for surround monitoring.
System Setup > SURROUND MONITOR screen g MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob Adjusts the surround monitor fader level. h MONITOR OUTPUT button Turns the surround monitor output on or off. i Meter field Shows the output level for each channel of the surround monitor. Press this field to open the SURROUND MONITOR SETTINGS popup window. j SURROUND CUE popup button Accesses the SURROUND CUE SETTINGS popup window, in which you can make detailed settings for surround cue.
System Setup > SURROUND MONITOR SETTINGS popup window SURROUND MONITOR SETTINGS popup window 4 1 2 5 3 6 7 8 9 ! ) @ # % $ This screen contains the following items. a MONITOR SOURCE SELECT buttons Select the source that will be output to the MONITOR bus. b CUE INTERRUPT button Press this button to interrupt the surround monitor signal by the surround cue signal. If this button is on and surround cue is enabled, the surround cue signal will be sent to the surround monitor output.
System Setup > SURROUND MONITOR SETTINGS popup window g DIMMER ON CUE knob Adjusts the amount by which the surround monitor signal will be attenuated when surround cue is on. ( DIMMER ON CUE indicators When surround cue is active, CUE A and/or CUE B will light. h DIMMER ON TALKBACK LEVEL knob Adjusts the amount by which the monitor signal will be attenuated when talkback is on. ( DIMMER ON TALKBACK indicator Indicates the on/off status of the talkback dimmer function.
System Setup > MONITOR SOURCE popup window (SURROUND) MONITOR SOURCE popup window (SURROUND) 1 This screen contains the following items. a MONITOR SOURCE DEFINE buttons Each button displays the name of the assigned surround monitor source. Press these buttons to access the MONITOR SOURCE SELECT popup window, in which you can assign surround monitor sources to individual DEFINE buttons.
System Setup > MONITOR SOURCE popup window (SURROUND) MONITOR SOURCE popup window (SURROUND) 2 1 This screen contains the following items. a NAME buttons You can enter the name of the external source that is assigned to each button. When you press a button, a keyboard screen appears, allowing you to edit the name. b SOURCE popup buttons These buttons select the surround monitor source.
System Setup > SURROUND CUE SETTING popup window SURROUND CUE SETTING popup window 5 You can allocate the surround cue (in which the surround monitor environment is cued to the input channel) to the [Fn] key. Using the USE CUE KEY FOR SURROUND CUE function will also allow you to use [CUE]. This screen contains the following items. a CUE MODE buttons Enable you to specify the operation mode when multiple [CUE] keys are on. b ( MIX CUE mode............
System Setup > PHONES popup window PHONES popup window 1 This screen contains the following items. a USE PHONES B FOR SURROUND MONITOR button In surround mode, the USE PHONES B FOR SURROUND MONITOR button is displayed. If you turn this on, a block diagram graphic is shown, and PHONE B is used for surround monitor.
Patching > Input channel I/O unit section Patching Input channel I/O unit section This section describes the I/O unit section for the input channels.
Patching > Input channel I/O unit section About “Silk” Silk uses proprietary Yamaha “VCM technology” digital signal processing to faithfully replicate the “Silk” processing that is built into numerous high-end analog audio devices developed, manufactured, and sold by Rupert Neve Designs.
Patching > Input channel mixing engine section Input channel mixing engine section This section describes the mixing engine section for the input channels. TWINLANe Network (400 Ch) DSP Engine 1 A INPUT CHANNEL 256 INPUT PATCH HY slot1/2 A/B input B VSC* 2 * Virtual Sound Check a A/B input Switches between two sources A and B that are patched to the input channel. You can use this in the following ways. b ( Patch a backup circuit in advance for quick selection in an emergency.
Patching > Input channel mixing engine section c Filter ( HPF The slope of the high-pass filter can be specified as -6 dB/oct, -12 dB/oct, -18 dB/oct, and -24 dB/oct. ( LPF The slope of the low-pass filter can be specified as -6 dB/oct or -12 dB/oct. d EQ This is a four-band parametric EQ. ( 4 BAND PEQ The following EQ types can be selected: PRECISE, AGGRESSIVE, SMOOTH, or LEGACY. Two sets of EQ parameter settings (A and B) can be saved for convenient comparison.
Patching > Input channel mixing engine section This dynamics type reduces the output by a fixed value (RANGE) when a signal greater than the THRESHOLD level is input. This is effective if you want to lower the volume level of background music using the KEY IN SOURCE signal. DUCKING ・ KEY IN SOURCE Selects the source of the key-in signal. In addition to SELF, the key-in signal can also be selected directly from another channel or input patch. f INSERT Two inserts are provided: Insert 1 and Insert 2.
Patching > Input channel mixing engine section A INPUT PATCH DIGITAL GAIN B VSC* R PRE FILTER L/R PATH HPF LPF PRE EQ 4-BAND PEQ PRE DYN1 DYNAMICS 1 PRE DYN2 DYNAMICS 2 LEVEL/ DCA1-24 PRE POST FADER FADER ON POST ON PAN/BAL TO ST R LCR (STEREO Only) KEY IN KEY IN PAN LINK ) INPUT TO MIX/ INPUT TO MATRIX 9 * Virtual Sound Check INPUT TO MIX/INPUT TO MATRIX PRE FILTER PRE EQ ON PRE DYN1 CH ON CH FADER CH DCA 1- 24 LEVEL PRE DYN2 PAN/BAL PRE FADER POST FADER FOLLOW FOLLOW FOLLOW
Patching > Input channel mixing engine section The “INPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY” lets you store and recall various input channel parameters.
Patching > Patching the input ports Patching the input ports You can assign input channel patches into two groups (A and B) and switch between these groups. This function is convenient in the following applications: ( ( Assigning back-up patches as group B, and switching to this group in case of emergency. Quickly switching between the input channel groups depending on the programs on the stage or situations. 1 2 Press the PATCH button on the menu bar to access the PATCH screen. Press the INPUT tab.
Patching > Display when patching conflicts between engines Display when patching conflicts between engines When performing an operation that tries to steal a patch from an output port already patched to another DSP engine on a TWINLANe network, a confirmation message will be displayed on the control surface that initiated the operation, and the control surface from which the patch was stolen now shows that a modification was made.
Patching > Display when patching conflicts between engines Patch screen display 2 1 2 1 a TWINLANe network (Main, Sub) assignment display Output channels that are not assigned to the TWINLANe network are shown with the number of patches in red.
Patching > Display when patching conflicts between engines b Display when not correctly patched When the box containing the number of assignments for the applicable port is red or yellow, patching to the port is not yet enabled. The status is color-coded. Red: Not Available/Used, Yellow: Not Active ・Not Available The port is not available because the number of ports is limited due to the sampling rate setting for the card.
Patching > INPUT patch window INPUT patch window 5 6 4 1 2 This screen contains the following items. a 3 7 Channel list (Input channels) Indicates the input channel numbers as patching destinations. b Channel display Indicates the channels that will be assigned to the input port. c Grid This grid lets you patch input ports (horizontal lines) to input channels (vertical columns). Currently-patched grids are indicated by white squares. Press or click a desired grid to set or disable the patch.
Patching > INPUT patch window e SHOW PORT button Enables you to select the ports that are displayed in the grid from A, B, and A+B. f Continuous Patch Press the continuous patch button button, and then rotate the select knob to in the upper right to patch the intersecting channels continuously. If you press the continuous patch button, the button and the button will appear. Press the button again to confirm the selected continuous patches.
Patching > Output channel mixing engine section Output channel mixing engine section This section describes the mixing engine section for the output channels. MIX bus MIX1-72 INSERT 1 INSERT 2 PLUG-IN 1 PLUG-IN 2 PLUG-IN 3 PLUG-IN 4 PLUG-IN 1 PLUG-IN 2 PLUG-IN 3 PLUG-IN 4 INSERT 2 4 INSERT 1 LEVEL/ DCA1-24 DIMMER HPF TALKBACK LPF PRE FILTER PRE EQ 1 8 BAND PEQ 2 DYNAMICS PRE DELAY PRE DYN KEY IN 3 DELAY Max.
Patching > Output channel mixing engine section d INSERT Two inserts are provided: Insert 1 and Insert 2. In each insert, you can insert up to four plug-ins/GEQ/PEQ/external devices (via the I/O jacks). Any insert point can be selected independently for INSERT 1 and INSERT 2. e DELAY Up to 1000 msec of delay is provided on each channel. You can freely select the delay insert point. You can select the delay time unit from the following: meter, feet, sample, msec, frame, depending on your application.
Patching > Output channel mixing engine section Pair setting You can pair adjacent odd/even MIX buses (in that order), and use them as a stereo module. BUS TYPE MIX buses can be either the FIXED type whose send level is fixed or the VARI type whose send level is variable; you can switch each odd/even-numbered pair to either type. Library The “OUTPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY” lets you store and recall various output channel parameters.
Patching > Output channel mixing engine section ・ KEY IN SOURCE Selects the source of the key-in signal. In addition to SELF, the key-in signal can also be selected directly from another channel or input patch. You can use an HPF, BPF, or LPF as a KEY IN FILTER. d INSERT Two inserts are provided: Insert 1 and Insert 2. In each insert, you can insert up to four plug-ins/GEQ/PEQ/external devices (via the I/O jacks). Any insert point can be selected independently for INSERT 1 and INSERT 2.
Patching > Output channel mixing engine section b EQ This is an eight-band parametric EQ. ( 8 BAND PEQ The following EQ types can be selected: PRECISE, AGGRESSIVE, SMOOTH, or LEGACY. Two sets of EQ parameter settings (A and B) can be saved for convenient comparison. The FREQUENCY parameter of each band is normally set in 1/12 octave steps, but if you need more precise adjustment, you can set it in 1/24 octave steps.
Patching > Output channel mixing engine section PRE POST PRE FILTER POST FADER PRE EQ POST ON PRE DYN1 PRE DYN2 PRE FADER Library The “OUTPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY” lets you store and recall various input channel parameters. MONO STEREO B can be set to MONO. If it is set to MONO, the same signal is sent to L and R of STEREO B. This is also used as the CENTER channel of LCR. If it is set to MONO, the same signal is sent to L and R of STEREO B.
Patching > Output channel I/O unit section Output channel I/O unit section DELAY, GAIN, and PORT TRIM can be specified for the output signal from the output channel.
Patching > Patching the output ports Patching the output ports This section explains how to edit the output patching. 1 2 Press the PATCH button on the menu bar to access the PATCH screen. Press the OUTPUT tab. The “OUTPUT patch window” (p.373) appears. 3 4 5 Use the knob in the upper right to display the desired output ports. Use the knob in the lower-left corner to display the output channels. Press the desired grid cell to patch a desired channel.
Patching > OUTPUT patch window OUTPUT patch window 4 5 1 2 This screen contains the following items. a 3 6 Channel list (Output channels) Indicates the output channel numbers as patching destinations. b Channel display Indicates the channels that will be assigned to the output port. NOTE The number at right is the number of channels that are patched.
Patching > OUTPUT patch window d OUTPUT COMPONENT/SLOT/CH (input components/slots/channels) This section indicates the type of the output component, slot number, and channel number for the output port. The abbreviations displayed in this section have the following meaning. ( M1–M8, S1–S8 ......... I/O rack 1–8 ( CS1, CS2.........Control surface ( DSP.......... DSP engine ( PLUG-IN.........
Patching > Changing the name Changing the name In the PATCH/NAME popup window, you can view and change the icon, channel color, and name of the input channels, output channels and DCAs. 1 2 Press the PATCH button on the menu bar to access the PATCH screen. Press the NAME tab. The “PATCH/NAME screen” (p.376) appears. 3 Press the NAME EDIT popup button of the channel, DCA, or MUTE group for which you want to edit the channel name, icon or channel color. The NAME/ICON EDIT popup window appears.
Patching > PATCH/NAME screen PATCH/NAME screen 1 2 3 4 This screen contains the following items. a Tabs Use these tabs to switch between items. b NAME EDIT popup buttons Indicate the current name of channels, DCAs and MUTE group. Press one of these buttons to display the keyboard window or icon edit window, in which you can edit the name. c LIBRARY button Press this button to open the NAME library window. d Channel/group select tab Use the corresponding screen encoder or the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
Patching > NAME/ICON EDIT popup window NAME/ICON EDIT popup window 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The window contains the following items. a Channel name edit box Indicates the name of the channel that is currently selected for editing. You can also directly enter the name from the USB keyboard. b Keyboard switch button Toggles between the keyboard window and CH COLOR/ICON popup window. c SAVE AS A TEMPLATE button Turn this button on and press a template select button (7) to store the setting as a template.
Patching > Port to port Port to port This function freely routes the input and output of each component from an input port to an output port via the TWINLANe network without passing it through a mixing channel. Port to port can be used with the following inputs and outputs.
Patching > Port to port Patch from an RPio on the main network to SLOT BRIDGE input (BRIDGE IN: HY1) Patch 2 (patch target SLOT BRIDGE): Patch from a SLOT BRIDGE input (BRIDGE IN: HY1) to SLOT BRIDGE output (BRIDGE OUT: HY2) Patch 3 (patch target HY2): Patch from a SLOT BRIDGE output (BRIDGE OUT: HY2) to an RPio on the sub network 1 2 Press the PATCH button on the menu bar to access the PATCH screen. Press the PORT-PORT tab. The “PORT-PORT patch window” (p.380)appears.
Patching > PORT-PORT patch window PORT-PORT patch window 1 3 4 2 5 6 This screen contains the following items. a DISPLAY MODE buttons Press a button to switch the patch target that is shown in the patch grid. The upper line of buttons are for patching within a slot and to the bridge, and the lower line of buttons are for bridge patching between slots. b Input components/slots/channels This section shows input component and bridge information, slot numbers, and channel numbers.
Patching > PORT NAME tab PORT NAME tab 3 1 5 4 2 6 8 7 This screen contains the following items. a Network selection tab Press this tab to select the device network. TWINLANe, DANTE, DSP/CS b Device selection buttons Press these buttons to select the device to edit. c Device label Press this to input the device name. d Slot list Press a slot label to input a slot name. e Port list Press a port label to input the port name.
Patching > PORT NAME tab NOTE ( ( To enable the label you set, synchronize data from the control surface to the device side. Synchronizing in the opposite direction will overwrite the labels you set. When a Dante network is selected, this displays the DANTE SETUP popup window. When THIS CONSOLE is on, the label set using the control surface will be enabled, and the label set on the device side will be overwritten. When DANTE CONTROLLER is on, the label set on the device side will be enabled.
Patching > SUB IN SUB IN SUB IN is a function that enables you to route signals directly from the input ports to the output bus. You can use this to make cascading connections from the bus outputs of other consoles to expand the number of inputs. SUB IN patch screen 1 2 a Selection list These are the input ports for the input source. b SUB IN ATT button Press this to display the SUB IN ATT popup window, in which you can adjust the input level.
Patching > SUB IN Use the tabs to select an output channel, and use the knobs to adjust the gain for each channel.
Monitor > About monitoring Monitor About monitoring The RIVAGE PM series features two monitor outputs (MONITOR A and MONITOR B). You can select the monitor source and set the output level for each monitor output individually. It includes the following features: ( You can specify, mix and monitor up to eight channel signals. ( You can select not only channel or bus signals, but signals directly from input patches as monitor signals.
Monitor > About monitoring b Input selector You can provide eight sources to be monitored, and switch between them. The signals of up to eight channels can be assigned to one monitor source. You can select not only channel or bus signals, but signals directly from input patches as monitor signals. c Monitor circuit structure This consists of three channels: L-channel, R-channel, and CENTER channel. d DELAY Allows the monitor signal to be delayed. You can specify up to 1000 msec.
Monitor > Using the Monitor function (top panel) Using the Monitor function (top panel) Controlling the Monitor function via the UTILITY section 1 a MONITOR A/B knobs Adjust the output level of the monitoring signals.
Monitor > Using the Monitor function Using the Monitor function Controlling the Monitor function via the MONITOR screen In this screen, you can select desired monitor sources to monitor them from the PHONES A/B output jacks or external monitor speakers. 1 Connect your monitor system to the OMNI OUT jacks or AES/EBU jack on the rear panel. Monitor signals can be sent to any desired output jack or output channel.
Monitor > Using the Monitor function NOTE If desired, you can specify output ports only for MONITOR OUT L and R to monitor through two speakers. 8 To enable monitoring, press the MONITOR OUTPUT button to turn it on. The monitor source you selected in step 5 will be sent to the output destination you specified in step 7. NOTE The PHONES A/B output jacks will always output the monitor signal, regardless of whether the MONITOR OUTPUT button is on or off.
Monitor > Monitor sources Monitor sources You can choose from the following sources.
Monitor > MONITOR screen MONITOR screen 2 1 3 5 7 3 5 6 4 7 6 8 4 8 This screen contains the following items. a MONITOR popup button Enables you to access the MONITOR SETTINGS popup window, in which you can make detailed monitoring settings. Select MONITOR A or B as the control target, and set the parameters in the corresponding field. b DIMMER field Enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function, which temporarily attenuates monitor signals.
Monitor > MONITOR screen g MONITOR OUTPUT button Switches Monitor Out on or off. h Meter field Indicates the output level of Monitor Out channels L, R, and C. Press this field to open the MONITOR SETTINGS popup window.
Monitor > MONITOR SETTINGS popup window MONITOR SETTINGS popup window ( @ 1 9 4 5 ) 8 6 ! 2 3 $ % 7 & 9 2 4 8 6 ^ # * ! 5 ) 1 3 @ 7 This screen contains the following items. a SOURCE SELECT DEFINE buttons Enable you to select one of the DEFINE 1‒ 8 sources that will be output to the MONITOR bus. b MONITOR DELAY knob Indicates the currently-specified delay time.
Monitor > MONITOR SETTINGS popup window f MONITOR OUT MODE This section enables you to select one of the following monitor output modes: ( LR + C DOWNMIX In this mode, the L/C/R channel signals will be downmixed and output in stereo. ( MONO In this mode, monitor signals will be output in monaural. ( LCR In this mode, the L/C/R channel signals will be output. g CENTER CH ON button If you plan not to monitor the center channel, turn this button off.
Monitor > MONITOR SETTINGS popup window q DIMMER ON TALKBACK LEVEL knob Adjusts the amount by which the monitor signal will be attenuated when talkback is on. r DIMMER ON TALKBACK indicator Indicates the on/off status of the talkback dimmer function. s Tabs Use these tabs to switch between the MONITOR SETTINGS popup window and MONITOR SOURCE popup window.
Monitor > MONITOR SOURCE popup window MONITOR SOURCE popup window 1 This screen contains the following items. a 1 MONITOR SOURCE DEFINE buttons Each button displays the name of the assigned monitor source. Press these buttons to access the MONITOR SOURCE SELECT popup window, in which you can assign monitor sources to individual DEFINE buttons.
Monitor > MONITOR SOURCE SELECT popup window (INPUT) MONITOR SOURCE SELECT popup window (INPUT) 2 1 3 4 5 This screen contains the following items. a Monitor source selection buttons Enable you to select monitor sources that will be assigned to the DEFINE buttons. The selected monitor sources will be highlighted. Press the same button again to cancel the selection. NOTE You can select up to eight monitor sources. If you select eight monitor sources, no further selections will be possible.
Monitor > MONITOR SOURCE SELECT popup window (OUTPUT) MONITOR SOURCE SELECT popup window (OUTPUT) 2 1 3 4 5 This screen contains the following items. a Monitor source selection buttons Enable you to select monitor sources that will be assigned to the DEFINE buttons. The selected monitor sources will be highlighted. Press the same button again to cancel the selection. NOTE You can select up to eight monitor sources. If you select eight monitor sources, no further selections will be possible.
Monitor > MONITOR SOURCE SELECT popup window (DIRECT INPUT) MONITOR SOURCE SELECT popup window (DIRECT INPUT) In this window you can assign the slots or ports to up to 16 channel direct inputs as the possible direct monitor sources. You can select up to eight direct monitor sources. 1 a 2 3 1 2 3 Monitor source selection buttons Enable you to select the direct inputs. NOTE You can select up to eight monitor sources. If you select eight monitor sources, no further selections will be possible.
Monitor > INPUT PATCH popup window INPUT PATCH popup window 1 This screen contains the following items. a Input jack select buttons Enable you to select the input jacks from which you want to monitor the signals. b CLOSE button Press this button to close the popup window and return to the previous screen.
Monitor > Inserting a plug-in into monitor signals Inserting a plug-in into monitor signals You can insert a plug-in into the monitor signals (L, R and C) of MONITOR A and MONITOR B individually. You can insert plug-ins and GEQ/PEQ. 1 2 Press the MONITOR button on the menu bar to access the MONITOR screen. Press the MONITOR popup button or the meter field. The “MONITOR SETTINGS popup window (insert)” (p.402) appears. 3 Press the INSERT button. The “MONITOR INSERT popup window” (p.403) appears.
Monitor > MONITOR SETTINGS popup window (insert) MONITOR SETTINGS popup window (insert) 2 1 2 1 This screen contains the following items. a INSERT button Press this button to display the window, in which you can insert plug-ins into the monitor signal. b INSERT ON button Switches the plug-in insert on or off. The currently-specified plug-ins are displayed to the left of the INSERT ON button.
Monitor > MONITOR INSERT popup window MONITOR INSERT popup window 1 This screen contains the following items. a MOUNT popup button Press this button to display the window, in which you can insert plug-ins to the monitor signal.
Monitor > INSERT MOUNT screen INSERT MOUNT screen 1 This screen contains the following items. a Tabs Enable you to select REVERB, dElAY/MOD, EQ/DYNAMICS, or GEQ/PEQ.
Monitor > About cue About cue In order to check the sound of a selected individual channel or DCA, you can output it to MONITOR OUT, CUE OUT, or PHONES OUT for auditioning. The RIVAGE PM series provides two cue outputs, CUE A and CUE B.
Monitor > About cue e PEQ A dedicated 8-band parametric EQ for the cue is provided. f CUE LEVEL This adjusts the output level of the CUE channel. The CUE level can also be assigned to a fader. g Output structure ( L-channel and R-channel of CUE A ( L-channel and R-channel of CUE B CUE MODE You can select either MIX CUE or LAST CUE as the cue mode. MIX CUE: All selected channels will be mixed and auditioned. LAST CUE: Only most recently selected channel will be auditioned.
Monitor > About cue Channel Mode/Bay Mode You can choose one of two modes: “Channel Mode” which lets you specify the CUE A/B destination of each channel, and “Bay Mode” which lets you specify the cue destination of each control surface bay being operated. The choice of Channel Mode or Bay Mode is made in the PREFERENCES page. ( Channel Mode This mode assumes that one operator is using two cue buses separately. Each channel’s cue audio destination (Cue A, B, A+B) can specified individually.
Monitor > About Cue mode and Solo mode About Cue mode and Solo mode All input channels, output channels, and DCAs feature the [CUE] key for the Cue/Solo function. The [CUE] key provides two modes: Cue mode and Solo mode. These modes differ as follows. ( ( Cue mode If you press the [CUE] key for the channels or DCAs, the corresponding cue signals will be sent to the dedicated CUE bus and then output from MONITOR OUT, PHONES OUT, and CUE OUT (Cue function).
Monitor > About cue/solo groups About cue/solo groups The cue signals can be categorized into the following four groups. 1 OUTPUT CUE group The cue/solo signals of output channels make up this group. To switch Cue/Solo for this group, in the Channel Strip section, press the OUTPUT [MIX]/[MATRIX] key, and then press the desired [CUE] key. Channel Strip section: [CUE] keys OUTPUT [MIX]/[MATRIX] keys 2 DCA CUE group The cue/solo signals of DCAs make up this group.
Monitor > About cue/solo groups 3 INPUT CUE group The cue/solo signals of input channels make up this group. To enable Cue/Solo for this group, in the Channel Strip section, press the INPUT [1-72]/[73-144] key, and then press the desired [CUE] key. Channel Strip section: [CUE] keys INPUT [1-72]/[73-144] keys 4 Other CUE group These cue signals are operated via buttons displayed on the touch screen.
Monitor > About cue/solo groups Other CUE group INPUT CUE group DCA CUE group OUTPUT CUE group 411
Monitor > CUE OPERATION mode CUE OPERATION mode About CUE OPERATION mode in Cue mode ( ( CH (Channel) mode This mode assumes only one operator will operate the system. You can specify the cue destination (CUE A, B, and A+B) for each channel individually. You can change this destination for each channel individually by holding down the [SHIFT] key and pressing the desired [CUE] key. (A->B->A+B->A->B->…) BAY mode This mode assumes two operators will operate the system.
Monitor > Using the Cue function Using the Cue function This section explains how to use the [CUE] key of a desired channel or DCA to monitor the Cue signal. NOTE Be aware that if you turn CUE INTERRUPTION off in the MONITOR SETTINGS popup window, the cue signal will not be sent to the connected monitor speakers. However, the PHONES output jacks on the front panel will always output cue signals regardless of the Monitor on/off setting.
Monitor > Using the Cue function 8 Press the [CUE] key of a desired channel or DCA to turn it on. The cue signal of the corresponding channel will be sent to the output destination specified in step 4, and also to the monitor output. You can also view the Cue meter in the meter area to check the output level of the cue signal.
Monitor > MONITOR screen (cue) MONITOR screen (cue) 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 This screen contains the following items. a CUE popup button Enables you to access the CUE popup window, in which you can make detailed cue settings. Select CUE A or B as the control target, and set the parameters in the corresponding field. b CUE MODE buttons Enable you to specify the operation mode when multiple [CUE] keys are on. ( MIX CUE mode All selected channels will be cue-monitored.
Monitor > MONITOR screen (cue) g CUE OUTPUT button Switches Cue Out on or off.
Monitor > CUE popup window CUE popup window 2 5 6 7 $ 1 ! 8 9 ) # 3 @ ^ & 4 % ! ^ & ) # @ 9 $ This screen contains the following items. a CUE SETTINGS popup button Press this button to access the CUE SETTINGS popup window, in which you can select the cue destination. You can select the cue destination (CUE A, CUE B, or A+B) for each channel. NOTE If CUE OPERATION MODE is set to BAY on the PREFERENCES popup window the cue destination will be specified for each bay.
Monitor > CUE popup window e INPUT CUE field This field enables you to make settings related to the input channel cue. ( Cue point select button Sets the cue point to PRE FILTER (immediately before the filter), PRE FADER (immediately before the fader), AFL (immediately after the fader), or POST PAN (immediately after PAN). NOTE Be aware that if you select POST PAN, you will be unable to monitor signals sent to the MONO bus from an input channel that is set to LCR mode.
Monitor > CUE popup window l EQ field ( EQ graph This field graphically indicates the approximate response of the EQ. Press this field to open the window, in which you can set the EQ parameters. ( EQ ON button Switches the EQ on or off. m CUE OUT PATCH button Press this button to access the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select output ports to patch to the cue out L/R channels. n CUE OUTPUT button Switches cue output on or off. o CUE LEVEL knob Indicates the cue output level.
Monitor > CUE SETTINGS popup window CUE SETTINGS popup window 2 1 3 This screen contains the following items. a 2 1 3 Channel select list Enables you to select a channel. b ALL button Press this button to apply or cancel the selected cue destination (CUE A, CUE B) for all channels simultaneously. If the send point is not selected for some channels in the column, “...” will appear. c CUE select buttons Enable you to select the cue destination for each channel.
Monitor > OUTPUT PATCH popup window OUTPUT PATCH popup window 1 This screen contains the following items. a Output jack select buttons Enable you to select the output jacks to which the signals will be routed. b CLOSE button Press this button to close the popup window and return to the previous screen.
Monitor > Using the Solo function Using the Solo function This function enables you to monitor the signals routed from one or more specified channels to the main mix outputs. 1 On the MONITOR screen, press the CUE popup button or the INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE field to open the CUE popup window. 2 Use the CUE MODE buttons to select either the mode in which channels are mixed for monitoring, or the mode in which only the last-selected channel is monitored. Select the MIX CUE button or LAST CUE button.
Monitor > Using the Solo function 6 Select input channels that will be excluded from Solo operations. (You can specify more than one.) The channels specified here will not be muted in Solo mode. The Solo Safe function is useful if you do not want to accidentally mute certain channels during Solo operations, such as the main Stereo channels, or Mix channels that send out mix signals to an external recorder. 7 Press the [CUE] key of a desired channel or DCA to turn it on.
Monitor > SOLO SAFE popup window SOLO SAFE popup window SOLO SAFE popup window (INPUT) 1 This screen contains the following items. a Tabs You can select desired input channels and/or output channels as the Solo Safe target. When you switch the INPUT/ OUTPUT tabs, the following buttons will appear to enable you to select channels.
Monitor > SOLO SAFE popup window SOLO SAFE popup window (OUTPUT) 425
Monitor > About oscillators About oscillators The RIVAGE PM10 features two oscillators that output individual sine waves with different frequencies to the desired channels. Also, LPF and HPF are provided for noise output. METER NOISE HPF OSC OUT LPF or SINE WAVE ODD OSC OUT EVEN SINE WAVE 2CH 1 a Oscillator operation mode ( SINE WAVE ( SINE WAVE 2CH ( NOISE (PINK NOISE/BURST NOISE) NOTE Oscillator assignments and on/off switching can also be assigned to a USER DEFINED key.
Monitor > Using the oscillators Using the oscillators You can send a sine wave or pink noise from the internal oscillator to a desired bus. 1 Press the MONITOR button on the menu bar. The “MONITOR screen (oscillator)” (p.429) appears. The OSCILLATOR field in the MONITOR screen lets you check the current oscillator settings, and turn the oscillator on or off. If you want to view or edit the oscillator settings in greater detail, use the OSCILLATOR popup window described in step 2 and subsequent steps.
Monitor > Destination of oscillator signals Destination of oscillator signals The buttons correspond to the following buses. CH1-72 button Input channels 1–72 CH73-144 button*1 Input channels 73 -144*1 MIX button MIX bus ST / MTRX button STEREO A bus L, STEREO A bus R, STEREO B bus L, STEREO B bus R, MATRIX buses MONITOR button MONITOR A L, MONITOR A R, MONITOR A C, MONITOR B L, MONITOR B R, MONITOR B C * 1 The number of channels varies depending on the connected DSP engine.
Monitor > MONITOR screen (oscillator) MONITOR screen (oscillator) 2 1 3 4 5 This screen contains the following items. a OSCILLATOR popup button Enables you to access the OSCILLATOR popup window, in which you can make detailed oscillator settings. b OSCILLATOR LEVEL field Adjusts the level of the oscillator. A meter beside the LEVEL knob indicates the output level of the oscillator. If OSCILLATOR MODE is set to SINE WAVE, the frequency of the oscillator is shown.
Monitor > OSCILLATOR popup window OSCILLATOR popup window 1 2 5 6 8 7 4 3 This screen contains the following items. a OSCILLATOR MODE buttons Select one of the following four oscillator operating modes: SINE WAVE A sine wave is output continuously. SINE WAVE 2CH Two sine waves (with different frequencies) are output separately. PINK NOISE Pink noise is output. BURST NOISE Pink noise is output intermittently. b Parameter field Enables you to set the oscillator parameters.
Monitor > OSCILLATOR popup window ( FREQUENCY buttons Enables you to select the sine-wave frequency from 100 Hz, 1 kHz, and 10 kHz. SINE WAVE 2CH: ( ( ( ( ( LEVEL knob (ODD) Indicates the output level of the odd-channel sine wave. Use the screen encoder to adjust the value. FREQ knob (ODD) Indicates the frequency of the odd-channel sine wave. Use the screen encoder to adjust the value. LEVEL knob (EVEN) Indicates the output level of the even-channel sine wave.
Monitor > OSCILLATOR popup window ( ( ( LEVEL knob, HPF knob, LPF knob These are the same as for the PINK NOISE mode. WIDTH knob Indicates the length of noise being output intermittently. Use the screen encoder to adjust the value. INTERVAL knob Indicates the length of silence between noise bursts. Use the screen encoder to adjust the value. Level INTERVAL Pink noise output WIDTH Time The BURST NOISE button is turned on.
Monitor > About talkback About talkback As a talkback input, you can select any input jack from input patches, as well as the TALKBACK jack on the top panel of the Control Surface. TALKBACK Terminal +48V MASTER +48V ON +48V ON METER ON 2 1 + - AD ON LEVEL OUTPUT PATCH TALKBACK OUT MIX 1-72 HPF 3 MATRIX 1-36 ANALOG INPUT GAIN STEREO A/B MONITOR SELECT INPUT PATCH ON TALKBACK DIMMER The dimmer function temporarily attenuates the monitor signal level when talkback is on.
Monitor > Using talkback (top panel) Using talkback (top panel) Controlling the Monitor function via the UTILITY section 1 2 3 4 a TALKBACK jack This is a balanced XLR-3-31 jack to which a talkback mic can be connected. b +48V indicator Lights up when +48V phantom power is supplied to the TALKBACK jack. c TALKBACK LEVEL knob Adjusts the input level of the mic connected to the TALKBACK jack. d TALKBACK [ON] key Switches the Talkback function on or off.
Monitor > Using talkback Using talkback Controlling the Monitor function via the MONITOR screen The Talkback function sends the signal (that is input at the input ports) to the desired bus. 1 Press the MONITOR button on the menu bar. The “MONITOR screen (talkback)” (p.437) appears. In the MONITOR screen, the TALKBACK field enables you to check the current talkback settings, and turn talkback on or off.
Monitor > Using talkback 8 When you finish making settings, press the CLOSE button to close the popup window. 9 10 Repeat steps 6–8 to assign the buses to other DEFINE buttons, as needed. 11 To enable talkback, press the TALKBACK ON button to turn it on. Select a DEFINE that you want to use for talkback, using DEFINE buttons in the TALK GROUPS field on the MONITOR screen or in the TALK GROUPS field in the TALKBACK SETTINGS popup window.
Monitor > MONITOR screen (talkback) MONITOR screen (talkback) 1 2 3 This screen contains the following items. a 4 TALKBACK popup button Enables you to access the TALKBACK popup window, in which you can make detailed talkback settings. b TALKBACK IN field ( TALKBACK IN +48 indicator Indicates the +48V on/off status for the TALKBACK jack. ( TALKBACK IN Ø indicator Indicates the normal-phase/reverse-phase status for the TALKBACK jack. ( ANALOG GAIN knob Sets the analog gain of the TALKBACK jack.
Monitor > MONITOR screen (talkback) c INPUT TO TALKBACK field ( INPUT TO TALKBACK patch button Press the button to open the INPUT PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can patch a desired input port/slot to talkback. The selected port/slot name will appear on the button. If no patch is assigned, button will indicate “----”. ( INPUT TO TALKBACK +48 indicator Indicates the +48V on/off status for the corresponding input port/slot.
Monitor > TALKBACK SETTINGS popup window TALKBACK SETTINGS popup window 6 3 4 1 2 5 This screen contains the following items. a TALKBACK IN field ( TALKBACK IN +48V button Switches on or off the phantom power (+48V) supplied to the TALKBACK jack. ( TALKBACK IN Ø button Switches between normal and reverse phase settings for the corresponding head amp. ( ANALOG GAIN knob Sets the analog gain of the TALKBACK jack. Use the screen encoder to adjust the value.
Monitor > TALKBACK SETTINGS popup window b INPUT TO TALKBACK field This field allows a mic connected to a conventional input port to be used as a talkback input. If you want to use an input jack other than the TALKBACK jack as supplementary input for talkback, select an input port here, and set the input level and other parameters. ( INPUT TO TALKBACK patch button Press the button to open the INPUT PATCH popup window, in which you can patch a desired input port to talkback.
Monitor > TALKBACK SETTINGS popup window e TALKBACK OUT field In this field, you can patch the TWINLANe network and assign talkback out signals directly to the output jack of an I/O rack, any OMNI OUT jack, or an output jack on a card slot. NOTE ( ( f TALKBACK OUT patch button Press the button to open the OUT PATCH popup window, in which you can patch any desired output port to talkback.
Monitor > TALK GROUPS popup window TALK GROUPS popup window 1 This screen contains the following items. a 1 DEFINE 1–8 buttons Press these buttons to access the bus selection popup window, in which you can select the signal destination.
Monitor > TALKBACK ASSIGN popup window TALKBACK ASSIGN popup window 1 This screen contains the following items. a Bus selection buttons Select the bus as the signal destination from the following options: b ( MX(MIX) 1–72..Output signals of MIX bus 1–72 output signal ( MT(MATRIX)1–36..Output signals of MATRIX bus 1–36 ( ST A L–ST B R..Output signals of STEREO A L–STEREO B R SET BY SEL button If this button is on, you’ll be able to add a bus by using the corresponding [SEL] key.
Monitor > About PHONES About PHONES This section explains how to set parameters related to monitoring using headphones. The following diagram shows the PHONES signal flow.
Monitor > Using PHONES Using PHONES 1 Press the MONITOR button on the menu bar. The “MONITOR screen (PHONES)” (p.446) appears. 2 2. Press the PHONES popup button. ThePHONES popup window appears. 3 4 Use the buttons on screen to make PHONES settings. When you finish making settings, press the CLOSE button.
Monitor > MONITOR screen (PHONES) MONITOR screen (PHONES) 1 This screen contains the following items. a PHONES popup display buttons Indicate the PHONES POINT assigned to PHONES A and PHONES B respectively. Press these buttons to access the PHONES popup window, in which you can make detailed PHONES settings.
Monitor > PHONES popup window PHONES popup window 7 6 1 8 3 4 9 2 5 6 1 8 3 4 9 2 5 This screen contains the following items. a MONITOR PHONES POINT button Select one of the following monitor source points: b ( PRE DELAY ( POST DELAY CUE PHONES POINT button Select one of the following cue source points: c ( PRE DELAY ( POST DELAY CENTER CH ON button If you plan not to monitor the center channel, turn this button off. When this button is off, the center channel will not be monitored.
Monitor > PHONES popup window f PHONES LEVEL LINK button If this button is on, the MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob will adjust the level of signals sent to the PHONES A or PHONES B output jack. g CLOSE button Press this button to close the popup window and return to the previous screen. h CUE INTERRUPT button Switches the INTERRUPT on/off.
Monitor > Using RTA Using RTA The RIVAGE PM10 features a real time analyzer (RTA), which provides visual feedback of the frequency spectrum of cued sources for 1/12 octaves (121 bands). The RTA accepts a single-channel signal, and enables you to switch between inputs A and B. If you select A+B MIX, the signal with higher levels will be displayed. There are four ways to access the RTA. ( “Using a popup window dedicated to the RTA” (p.450) ( “Using the HPF/EQ popup window for the channel parameters” (p.
Monitor > Using a popup window dedicated to the RTA Using a popup window dedicated to the RTA 1 Press the MONITOR button on the menu bar. The “MONITOR screen (RTA)” (p.451) appears. 2 Press the RTA popup button. The “RTA popup window” (p.452) appears. About the RTA display Only one RTA module is installed for the following three popup windows. Therefore, the RTA response graph will be displayed in only one of these windows.
Monitor > MONITOR screen (RTA) MONITOR screen (RTA) 1 This screen contains the following items. a RTA popup display buttons Indicate the name of ports assigned to RTA A and RTA B. If CUE OVERRIDE is on, these buttons will indicate the name of cues set by CUE OVERRIDE. Press these buttons to access the RTA popup window, in which you can make detailed RTA settings.
Monitor > RTA popup window RTA popup window 1 2 5 4 This screen contains the following items. a 3 6 8 7 Frequency response graph The frequency response graph indicates the result of frequency analysis by 1/12 octave bands. b OVER indicators If data exceeds 0 dB, OVER indicators will appear. c CUE OVERRIDE button The frequency response of the cue signal selected here will be displayed in the graph.
Monitor > RTA popup window h BALLISTICS field ( BALLISTICS button If this button is on, you will be able to add rate of decay to the analyzed frequency response graph. ( FAST/SLOW switch button Switches the decay rate of graph rendering (FAST/SLOW). i OFFSET knob Sets the offset for the RTA display.
Monitor > Using the HPF/EQ popup window for the channel parameters Using the HPF/EQ popup window for the channel parameters Press the EQ graph field on the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, or press the EQ field on the OVERVIEW screen to open the HPF/EQ popup window. HPF/EQ popup window (1ch) 1 2 3 4 a RTA button If this button is on, a semi-opaque frequency analysis graph of the input signal (immediately after EQ) will be superimposed on top of the EQ frequency response graph.
Monitor > Using the GEQ popup window for the inserted GEQ Using the GEQ popup window for the inserted GEQ 1 2 3 4 Press the rack container of the rack (which contains an inserted GEQ) to open the GEQ popup window. GEQ popup window a RTA button If this button is on, a semi-opaque frequency analysis graph of the input signal (immediately after EQ) will be superimposed on top of the EQ frequency response graph.
Monitor > Using the PEQ popup window for the inserted PEQ Using the PEQ popup window for the inserted PEQ Press the rack container of the rack (which contains an inserted PEQ) to open the PEQ popup window. PEQ popup window 1 2 3 4 a RTA button If this button is on, a semi-opaque frequency analysis graph of the input signal (immediately after EQ) will be superimposed on top of the EQ frequency response graph.
Meters > Meter area Meters Meter area The meter area displays various meters. Press any part of the meter area to recall the corresponding fader layer to the panel. 1 2 a ∑ clipping indicator This indicator lights when a signal is clipping at some point in the channel. b OVER indicator Lights to indicate that a signal is clipping at the meter point in the channel. NOTE Use the METERING POINT field to toggle the meter point.
Meters > Meter area a Meter area display selection buttons Select one of the meters shown on rows 1 and 2 of the meter area. Press OFF to display as a single row. The number of channels for INPUT changes depending on the system b METER FULL SCREEN button Displays the METER screen (FULL SCREEN). NOTE ( ( Press the CUE METER section when the cue is on, to clear the cue. When using Surround mode, SURROUND A/B will display in the MIX1-12 position, and SURROUND CUE will display in the CUE B position.
Meters > Operating the METER screen Operating the METER screen You can call up the METER screen (FULL SCREEN) to display the input/output levels for all channels onscreen, or to switch between meter points (the locations where level is detected) on the level meters. Tabs Use these tabs to switch between the INPUT METER, OUTPUT METER and DCA METER screens. METER FULL SCREEN (INPUT) screen This screen shows the input channel meters, faders and ON buttons.
Meters > Operating the METER screen METER FULL SCREEN (OUTPUT) screen This screen shows the meters for all output channels, STEREO A/B, CUE A/B and MONITOR A/B. NOTE When using Surround mode, SURROUND A/B will display instead of MIX1–12, SURROUND CUE will display to the left of CUE, and SURROUND MONITOR will display to the left of MONITOR.
Meters > Operating the METER screen METER FULL SCREEN (DCA) screen This screen shows the meters for DCA, STEREO A/B, CUE A/B and MONITOR A/B. NOTE When using Surround mode, SURROUND CUE will display to the left of CUE, and SURROUND MONITOR will display to the left of MONITOR.
Meters > Operating the METER screen Fader level/meter display This screen shows the meters and faders for each channel. 1 2 3 4 7 5 6 8 a Channel number Indicates the channel number. b ∑ clipping indicator This indicator lights when a signal is clipping at some point in the channel. c OVER indicator Lights to indicate that a signal is clipping at the meter point in the channel. d Meter Indicates the input or output level of the channel. Click this with your mouse to switch fader banks.
Meters > Operating the METER screen METERING POINT field Select one of the following meter points used for level detection. The meter points for level meters can be set separately for input and output channels. ■ For the INPUT METER • PRE GC • PRE D.GAIN • PRE HPF • PRE FADER • POST ON PRE CG is enabled when the device patched into the input features a GC. If the channel does not feature GC, the meter will indicate the PRE D.GAIN value at the PRE GC metering point.
CH Parameter > About GAIN/SILK CH Parameter About GAIN/SILK Here you can make settings for the input channel’s HA (head amp), such as phantom power on/off, gain, phase, and SILK. There are three ways to control GAIN/SILK. ( “Controlling GAIN/SILK via the Selected Channel section(CS-R10, CSR10- S, CSD-R7) ” (p.465) ( “Controlling GAIN/SILK via the OVERVIEW screen” (p.469) ( “GAIN/SILK popup window” (p.
CH Parameter > Controlling GAIN/SILK via the Selected Channel section(CS-R10, CSR10- S, CSD-R7) Controlling GAIN/SILK via the Selected Channel section(CS-R10, CSR10- S, CSD-R7) 1 2 4 3 5 7 6 8 This section contains the following items. a [ANALOG GAIN] knob Sets the analog gain for the head amp. b [+48V] key Switches phantom power (+48V) on or off. c SILK [TEXTURE] knob Adjusts the intensity of SILK processing. d SILK [ON] key Switches the SILK on or off.
CH Parameter > Controlling GAIN/SILK via the Selected Channel section(CS-R10, CSR10- S, CSD-R7) e SILK [BLUE/RED] key Toggles between two SILK characteristics (BLUE and RED): “BLUE” for solidity and power, and “RED” for sparkling energy. f [DIGITAL GAIN] knob Sets the digital gain of the channel. g GC indicator Lights up when GC (GAIN COMPENSATION) is enabled. h [Φ] Phase key Reverses the phase of the input signal.
CH Parameter > Controlling GAIN via the Selected Channel section (CS-R5, CS-R3) Controlling GAIN via the Selected Channel section (CSR5, CS-R3) 467
CH Parameter > Controlling GAIN via the Selected Channel section (CS-R5, CS-R3) 1 2 3 4 5 a [GAIN] knob Controls the analog gain or digital gain. b HPF [ON] key Switches the HPF on or off. c [HPF] knob Adjusts the HPF cutoff frequency. d [PAN] knob Adjusts the panning of the signal sent to the stereo buses. e [Fn] (Function) knob While pressing and holding down this knob, touch a parameter to assign the function.
CH Parameter > Controlling GAIN/SILK via the OVERVIEW screen Controlling GAIN/SILK via the OVERVIEW screen NOTE ( ( ( ( The PAD will be switched on or off internally when the HA gain is adjusted between +11 dB and +12 dB. Keep in mind that noise may be generated when using phantom power if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of an external device connected to the input jack.
CH Parameter > GAIN/SILK popup window GAIN/SILK popup window 1 2 3 5 4 6 7 8 9 ) @ $ # ! % 1 This screen contains the following items. a Channel select button Indicates the channel. Press this button to select the on-screen selected channel. The current channel icon, number, and color appear on the button, and the channel name appears below the button. b PATCH display Displays the channel’s patch status. c +48V button Switches the HA phantom power (+48V) on or off. d A.
CH Parameter > GAIN/SILK popup window h SILK [TEXTURE] knob Adjusts the TEXTURE parameter of SILK. i GC (GAIN COMPENSATION) button Switches the gain compensation on or off for that channel. j HPF indicator Indicates the high pass filter on/off status for each port. k D.GAIN knob Indicates the digital gain setting. Use the screen encoder to adjust the value. l Meter (channel input) This meter indicates the level after passing through GC (before D.GAIN).
CH Parameter > Controlling GAIN/SILK via the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen Controlling GAIN/SILK via the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen 1 2 3 Press the [VIEW] key to access the OVERVIEW screen. Select the channel that you want to operate. Press the ANALOG GAIN knob, the SILK [TEXTURE] knob, or the DIGITAL GAIN knob to open the “GAIN/SILK popup window” (p.470).
CH Parameter > Signal level that flows on the TWINLANe network when gain compensation is on Signal level that flows on the TWINLANe network when gain compensation is on If gain compensation is turned on, changing the analog gain will cause the signal being output to the TWINLANe network to be compensated by an equal and opposite amount as the change in the analog gain. This means that the signal on the audio network will be compensated to a consistent level in the digital domain.
CH Parameter > About EQ About EQ The RIVAGE PM10 features a full-parametric channel EQ (4-band for input and 8-band for output). It includes the following features: ( ( EQ can be used on all input channels and all output channels. High/low pass filters are independent of the EQ, and they can be used on either input channels or output channels. ( You can store and switch between two sets (A/B) of parameter settings. ( The FREQUENCY parameter for each band can be set in 1/24 oct steps.
CH Parameter > EQUALIZER section(CS-R10, CSR10- S, CSD-R7) EQUALIZER section(CS-R10, CSR10- S, CSD-R7) 1 3 5 2 4 7 6 a EQUALIZER [1-4]/[(5-8)] keys Switch the EQ bands for which you want to make settings. Pressing both [1-4] and [5-8] keys simultaneously will set the gain for all bands to 0 (FLAT). b EQUALIZER [ON] key Switches EQ on or off. c EQUALIZER [SHELF] key Switches peaking filter to shelving filter. d Display Indicates the selected EQUALIZER parameter.
CH Parameter > EQUALIZER section(CS-R10, CSR10- S, CSD-R7) e EQUALIZER [Q] knob Specifies the Q value. f EQUALIZER [FREQUENCY] knob Sets the frequency. g EQUALIZER [GAIN] knob Sets the gain.
CH Parameter > Controlling the EQ via the Selected Channel section (CS-R10, CSR10- S, CSD-R7) Controlling the EQ via the Selected Channel section (CSR10, CSR10- S, CSD-R7) 1 Select the channel that you want to operate. Four-band EQ (HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, LOW) is provided on all input channels. Eight-band EQ is provided on all output channels. (Control is divided into [1-4] and [5-8] groups of four bands each.
CH Parameter > EQUALIZER(CS-R5, CS-R3) EQUALIZER(CS-R5, CS-R3) 478
CH Parameter > EQUALIZER(CS-R5, CS-R3) 1 2 3 4 a EQUALIZER [ON] key Switches EQ on or off. b EQUALIZER [Q] knob Specify the Q value. c EQUALIZER [GAIN] knobs Adjust the gain. d EQUALIZER [FREQUENCY] knobs Adjust the frequency.
CH Parameter > Controlling the EQ via the Selected Channel section (CS-R5, CS-R3) Controlling the EQ via the Selected Channel section (CSR5, CS-R3) 1 Select the channel that you want to operate. Four-band EQ (HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, LOW) is provided on all input channels. Eight-band EQ is provided on all output channels. (Control is divided into [1-4] and [5-8] groups of four bands each.
CH Parameter > Controlling the EQ via the OVERVIEW screen Controlling the EQ via the OVERVIEW screen 1 Press the [VIEW] key to access the OVERVIEW screen. The EQ field shows the response of the EQ. EQ field OVERVIEW screen 2 3 Select the channel that you want to operate. Press the EQ field. The “EQ popup window (1ch)” (p.484) is displayed, and you will be able to adjust all of the EQ parameters. 4 Use the corresponding screen encoder or the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the EQ parameters.
CH Parameter > Controlling an EQ via the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen Controlling an EQ via the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen 1 Press the [VIEW] key to access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. EQ graph field SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen 2 3 4 Select the channel that you want to operate. Press the EQ field to access the “EQ popup window (1ch)” (p.484). Use the corresponding screen encoder or the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the EQ parameters.
CH Parameter > EQ popup window (CH 1–72, CH 73–144, MIX, MTRX/ST) EQ popup window (CH 1–72, CH 73–144, MIX, MTRX/ST) This window displays the corresponding input channels (or output channels) simultaneously. This page is only for display, and does not allow the parameters to be edited. It is useful when you need to quickly check multiple EQ settings, or when you want to copy and paste EQ settings between distant channels. 3 1 2 This screen contains the following items.
CH Parameter > EQ popup window (1ch) EQ popup window (1ch) This window enables you to edit all EQ parameters of the currently-selected channel. This is convenient if you want to make detailed EQ settings for a specific channel.
CH Parameter > EQ popup window (1ch) Output channels This screen contains the following items. a HPF ON/OFF button Switches the HPF on or off. b HPF FREQUENCY knob Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF. Use the screen encoder to adjust the value. c HPF type select button Enables you to set the HPF attenuation per octave to −6 dB/oct, −12 dB/oct, −18 dB/oct, or −24 dB/oct. d LPF ON/OFF button Switches the LPF on or off. e LPF FREQUENCY knob Indicates the cutoff frequency of the LPF.
CH Parameter > EQ popup window (1ch) i EQ FLAT button Press this button to reset the GAIN parameters of all EQ band to 0 dB. j EQ button Press this button to display the EQ graph. k RTA button If this button is on, a semi-opaque frequency analysis graph of the EQ-processed input signal will be superimposed on top of the EQ frequency response graph. l EQ graph Displays the parameter values for the EQ and filters. m PEAK HOLD The frequency response graph holds the peak level indication.
CH Parameter > EQ popup window (1ch) x DEFAULT button Press this button to reset all EQ/filter parameters to the initial values. y COPY button Copies the EQ parameter settings stored in the bank (selected via the A/B switching buttons) to buffer memory. z PASTE button Press this button to paste the settings copied in buffer memory to the EQ of the currently-selected bank. If valid data has not been copied into buffer memory, you will be unable to paste it.
CH Parameter > Touch EQ screen Touch EQ screen This screen enables you to adjust EQ parameters by using and sliding your fingers on the touch panel. Touch operations This section explains the EQ operations you can make by touching the Touch EQ screen. Use the multi-band operations to adjust parameters for multiple bands at once. -Boost band: A band set in the boost area (the region above 0 dB) You can change the boost amount for the band using the Multi-band function or multi-touch operations.
CH Parameter > Touch EQ screen e MULTI BAND OPERATION Turn this on to adjust multiple bands at once. ( BOOST When this option is selected, you can magnify or reduce the boost amount for all bands to be boosted by dragging the boost band to slide it up or down with one finger. ( CUT When this option is selected, you can amplify or attenuate the cut amount for all bands to be cut by dragging the cut band to slide it up or down with one finger.
CH Parameter > About dynamics About dynamics Input Channels feature two dynamics processors: Dynamics 1 and Dynamics 2. Output Channels feature one dynamics processor. They include the following features: ( You can select a dynamics function from six types, including GATE and COMP. ( You can store two sets (A/B) of parameter settings. ( You can use the parameter copy, paste, and library functions for Dynamics 1 and Dynamics 2 individually.
CH Parameter > DYNAMICS section DYNAMICS section 5 1 6 2 3 4 a DYNAMICS 1/2 IN LED Indicates the Dynamics input level. b DYNAMICS 1/2 GR LED Indicates the amount of Dynamics gain reduction. c DYNAMICS 1/2 [<]/[>] keys Switch parameters that are indicated on the DYNAMICS display. d DYNAMICS 1/2 setting knobs Set parameters that are indicated on the DYNAMICS display. e DYNAMICS 1/2 display Indicates the Dynamics parameters. f DYNAMICS 1/2 [ON] key Switches Dynamics on or off.
CH Parameter > Controlling a dynamics processor via the Selected Channel section Controlling a dynamics processor via the Selected Channel section 1 2 3 4 Use a [SEL] key to select the channel you want to control. Turn on the DYNAMICS 1/2 [ON] key in the Selected Channel section. Use the DYNAMICS 1/2 [<]/[>] keys to select the parameter that you want to adjust. Use the DYNAMICS 1/2 setting knobs to adjust the corresponding parameter.
CH Parameter > Controlling a dynamics processor via the OVERVIEW screen Controlling a dynamics processor via the OVERVIEW screen 1 Press the [VIEW] key to access the OVERVIEW screen. The DYNAMICS 1/2 field displays the dynamics processor on/off status and the amount of gain reduction. DYNAMICS 1 field DYNAMICS 2 field 2 3 Select the channel that you want to operate. Press the DYNAMICS 1/2 field to access the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window.
CH Parameter > Dynamics fields Dynamics fields DYNAMICS 1 field DYNAMICS 2 field These fields include the following items. 2 4 1 3 a Dynamics IN/OUT level meters This green bar graph shows the level of the signal before it passes through dynamics processing. b GR meter This orange bar graph indicates the amount of gain reduction produced by the dynamics processor. c Dynamics processor type Indicates the abbreviated name of the currently-selected dynamics processor type.
CH Parameter > Controlling a dynamics processor via the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen Controlling a dynamics processor via the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen 1 Press the [VIEW] key to access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen 2 3 4 DYNAMICS field Select the channel that you want to operate. Press the DYNAMICS field to access the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window. Use the corresponding screen encoder or the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the EQ parameters.
CH Parameter > DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window (1CH) DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window (1CH) All dynamics parameters can be viewed and edited. This is convenient when you want to make detailed dynamics settings for a specific channel. 2 3 4 5 6 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 9 ) 7 8 9 8 ! @ ) # ! $ @ # $ % a Tabs Use these tabs to select a channel that you want to view on the screen. b LIBRARY button Press this button to open the DYNAMICS library window.
CH Parameter > DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window (1CH) g Dynamics processor type button Enables you to select the dynamics processor type from the following: LEGACY COMP, COMP260, GATE, DE-ESSER, EXPANDER, DUCKING. h A/B switch buttons Enable you to switch between A and B as the storing destination for the dynamics parameters. i Dynamics graph Displays the input/output response of the dynamics processors. j DYNAMICS ON/OFF button Switches the dynamics processor on or off.
CH Parameter > DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window (1CH) m KEY IN FILTER field (This area will not appear if DE-ESSER is selected.) Enables you to make various settings for a filter that lets the key-in signal pass. ( Filter select buttons Select the type of filter from HPF, BPF, or LPF. To disable the filter, press the button that is turned on. ( Q knob Indicates the filter Q setting. Use the screen encoder to adjust the value. ( FREQUENCY knob Indicates the cutoff frequency of the filter.
CH Parameter > DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window (1CH) o Dynamics parameter setting knobs Indicate the dynamics parameter values. Use the corresponding screen encoder to adjust the value. The type of parameters will vary depending on the currently-selected dynamics processor type.
CH Parameter > DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window (CH 1-72, CH 73-144, MIX, MTRX/ST) DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window (CH 1-72, CH 73-144, MIX, MTRX/ST) This window enables you to make settings of the global dynamics parameters for the corresponding channel. 3 1 2 a Channel select buttons Enable you to select the channel that you want to operate. The current channel icon, number, threshold, and color appear on the button.
CH Parameter > DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window (CH 1-72, CH 73-144, MIX, MTRX/ST) Type = GATE If GATE is selected as the dynamics processor type, the indicator status means the following: Gate status indicator Red Yellow Green Dark On/Off status On On On Off Open/Close status Close Open Open — Amount of gain reduction 30 dB or higher 30dB 0dB — c Tabs Use these tabs to select a channel that you want to view on the screen.
CH Parameter > About insert About insert Each channel provides two inserts: Insert 1 and Insert 2. In each insert, you can insert up to four plug-ins, GEQ/PEQ, or external devices (via the I/O jacks). Each insert point can be selected independently for INSERT 1 and INSERT 2. For details on inserting plug-ins, refer to “Using plug-ins” (p.644). For details on inserting GEQ/PEQ, refer to “Inserting a GEQ/PEQ into a channel” on page 247.
CH Parameter > Using the Selected Channel section to make INSERT settings (only for CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) Using the Selected Channel section to make INSERT settings (only for CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) 1 2 Select the channel that you want to operate. Press the INSERT [PLUG-INS] key. The INSERT screen appears. 3 Use the INSERT 1/2 switch button and INSERT [A]–[D] buttons to select an insert channel and block for which you want to assign the external device.
CH Parameter > Using the Selected Channel section to make INSERT settings (only for CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) 5 Press the OUTBOARD tab and select OUTBOARD. 6 Press the OK button. The OUTBOARD screen appears. 7 Press the INSERT OUT patch select popup button to access the OUTPUT PATCH popup window. 8 9 Specify the output port that you want to use as the insert out. 10 11 Press the INSERT IN patch select popup button to access the INPUT PATCH popup window.
CH Parameter > INSERT section INSERT section 1 a 2 INSERT [PLUG-INS] key Enables you to recall a parameter setting screen for the inserted plug-in. b INSERT 1/2 [ON] keys Switch INSERT1 and INSERT2 on or off respectively.
CH Parameter > Using the OVERVIEW screen to make INSERT settings Using the OVERVIEW screen to make INSERT settings 1 Press the [VIEW] key to access the OVERVIEW screen. INSERT/DIRECT OUT field OVERVIEW screen 2 Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field for the channel into which you want to insert. The INSERT/D.OUT popup window appears There are two types of INSERT/D.OUT popup window: 1CH, and 12CH INSERT 1/2.
CH Parameter > Using the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to make INSERT settings Using the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to make INSERT settings 1 2 Select the channel that you want to operate. Press the [VIEW] key to access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. INSET field SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen 3 4 Press the INSERT field to access the MOUNT screen. Follow steps 5–11 under “Using the Selected Channel section to make INSERT settings.
CH Parameter > INSERT screen INSERT screen 1 2 3 This screen contains the following items. a INSERT 1/2 switch buttons Switches between INSERT1 and INSERT2. b INSERT block [A]–[D] buttons Indicate four plug-ins that have been assigned to INSERT1 and INSERT2 respectively. Press this button to display the edit screen for the assigned plug-in. c MOUNT popup button Press this button to display the MOUNT screen.
CH Parameter > OUTBOARD screen OUTBOARD screen 1 2 3 4 This screen contains the following items. a MOUNT popup button Press this button to display the MOUNT screen. b INSERT OUT patch select popup button Press this button to access a popup window in which you can select an output port. The currently-selected port is indicated on the button. To insert an external device to a channel via the RPio, you must assign the channel to the TWINLANe network.
CH Parameter > INSERT/D.OUT popup window (1CH) INSERT/D.OUT popup window (1CH) 1 1 This screen contains the following items. a INSERT block [A]–[D] buttons Indicate four plug-ins that have been assigned to INSERT1 and INSERT2 respectively. Press this button to display the edit screen for the assigned plug-in.
CH Parameter > INSERT/D.OUT popup window (12CH INSERT 1, 12CH INSERT 2) INSERT/D.OUT popup window (12CH INSERT 1, 12CH INSERT 2) 1 2 3 This screen contains the following items. a INSERT ON button Switches the insert on/off.
CH Parameter > Inserting an external device into a channel Inserting an external device into a channel You can insert an external device (compressor, EQ, etc.) into a channel via on the RPio. Only the INSERT 1C for channels 1-36 supports this function. FOH area Stage area TWINLANe Console Network 1 Assign the channels that will be used by the DSP engines to the TWINLANe network.
CH Parameter > Inserting an external device into a channel 2 Specify the input/output ports that you want to use as the insert out for INSERT 1C of channels 1-36.
CH Parameter > Directly outputting an input channel Directly outputting an input channel The signal of an input channel can be directly output from the OUTPUT jack of an I/O rack, any desired OMNI OUT jack, or an output channel of a desired card slot. 1 In the OVERVIEW screen of the input channel that you want to directly output, press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field, or press the DIRECT OUT field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
CH Parameter > Directly outputting an input channel 6 Press the DIRECT OUT ON button to turn it ON. Direct output is now enabled. Adjust the input level and other settings on the external device as necessary. 7 If necessary, make Direct Out settings for other channels in the same way.
CH Parameter > INSERT/D.OUT popup window (1CH/D.OUT) INSERT/D.OUT popup window (1CH/D.OUT) 1 2 3 This screen contains the following items. a 4 DIRECT OUT point Enables you to select the signal extraction point as PRE FILTER, PRE EQ, PRE DYN1, PRE DYN2, PRE FADER, POST FADER, or POST ON. b DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob Indicates the output level of the Direct Out. You can press this knob and then use the screen encoder or the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the level.
CH Parameter > INSERT/D.OUT popup window (12CH/D.OUT) INSERT/D.OUT popup window (12CH/D.OUT) This window is convenient if you want to make settings for multiple channels at one time. 1 2 3 4 5 This screen contains the following items. a DIRECT OUT ON button Switches direct out on/off. The currently-specified Direct Out point is indicated in the lower part of the button. b DIRECT OUT PATCH popup button Indicates the currently-selected port. If nothing is selected, the button indicates “----”.
CH Parameter > Patching multiple Direct Outs simultaneously Patching multiple Direct Outs simultaneously 1 Press the PATCH button on the menu bar to access the PATCH screen. This screen includes several pages, which you can switch between using the tabs located at the top of the screen. 2 Press the DIRECT OUT tab. The “DIRECT OUT page” (p.519) opens. 3 Use the port select knob to display the ports of the slot that will be used for DIRECT OUT. 4 5 Use the channel select knob to display channels.
CH Parameter > DIRECT OUT page DIRECT OUT page 5 ) 6 9 7 1 2 3 4 This screen contains the following items. a 8 ! Channel select list Enables you to select the channels that you want to view on the screen. b Channel select knob Enables you to select the channel that you want to use for Direct Out. c Channel display This area displays the channel name of each input channel that will be a patch source.
CH Parameter > DIRECT OUT page g DIRECT OUT ASSIGN (assign) Indicates the number of channels assigned to each port. h Grid This grid enables you to patch input channels (vertical columns) to output ports (horizontal lines). Currently-patched grids are indicated by white squares. Press or click a desired grid to set or disable the patch. i Continuous Patch Press the continuous patch button button, and then rotate the select knob (b) (j) to patch the intersecting channels continuously.
CH Parameter > About delay About delay Each input/output channel features a channel delay of up to 1000 msec. You can select the delay time unit from the following: meter, feet, sample, msec, frame, depending on your application. You can also specify insert points for the delay on each channel individually. There are three ways to set the delay: ( “Controlling the delay via the Selected Channel section(CS-R10, CSR10- S, CSD-R7) ” (p.523) ( “Controlling the delay via the OVERVIEW screen” (p.
CH Parameter > DELAY section(CS-R10, CSR10- S, CSD-R7) DELAY section(CS-R10, CSR10- S, CSD-R7) 1 2 3 This screen contains the following items. a DELAY [ON] key Switches the delay on or off. b DELAY display Indicates the delay value. c [DELAY] knob Sets the delay value.
CH Parameter > Controlling the delay via the Selected Channel section(CS-R10, CSR10- S, CSD-R7) Controlling the delay via the Selected Channel section(CS-R10, CSR10- S, CSD-R7) 1 2 3 Use a [SEL] key to select the channel you want to control. Turn on the DELAY [ON] key in the Selected Channel section. Use the [DELAY] knob to adjust the DELAY value.
CH Parameter > Controlling the delay via the OVERVIEW screen Controlling the delay via the OVERVIEW screen 1 2 Press the [VIEW] key to access the OVERVIEW screen. Press the DELAY field to access the DELAY popup window. This window includes several pages, which you can switch between using the tabs located at the top of the window. 3 4 Press the 12CH tab to open the DELAY popup window (12CH). 5 Perform the same operations for other channels as desired.
CH Parameter > Controlling the delay via the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen Controlling the delay via the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen 1 Press the [VIEW] key to access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. DELAY field SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen 2 3 Select the channel that you want to operate. 4 Set the insert point if necessary. Use the corresponding screen encoder or the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the delay parameters. Use the “DELAY popup window (12ch)” (p.526) to set the insert point.
CH Parameter > DELAY popup window (12ch) DELAY popup window (12ch) 7 8 6 1 2 3 4 5 This screen contains the following items. a DELAY SCALE popup button Press this button to access the “DELAY SCALE popup window” (p.529) in which you can select the unit for the delay time. b Channel select buttons Each button will light to indicate that the corresponding channel is selected. Press the button to select the channel. c DELAY ON buttons Switch delay on or off.
CH Parameter > DELAY popup window (12ch) f Tabs Use these tabs to select a channel that you want to view on the screen. g COPY button Copies the delay parameter settings to buffer memory. h PASTE button Press this button to paste the settings that were copied in buffer memory to the delay of the currently-selected channel. If valid data has not been copied into buffer memory, you will be unable to paste it.
CH Parameter > DELAY popup window (CH 1-72, CH 73-144, MIX, MTRX/ST) DELAY popup window (CH 1-72, CH 73-144, MIX, MTRX/ ST) This window displays the corresponding input channels (or output channels) simultaneously. It is useful when you want to quickly check the delay setting for multiple channels. 4 1 2 3 This screen contains the following items. a Channel select button Enable you to select the channel that you want to operate. The current channel icon, number, and color appear on the button.
CH Parameter > DELAY SCALE popup window DELAY SCALE popup window 1 2 3 4 5 6 You can select the delay scale from the following five options. a METER The distance in meter, calculated as the speed of sound at an air temperature of 20 °C (343.59m/s) × the delay time (seconds). b FEET The distance in feet, calculated as the speed of sound at an air temperature of 20 °C (68 °F) (1127.26 feet/s) × the delay time (seconds). c SAMPLE (number of samples) The delay time is shown as the number of samples.
CH Parameter > DELAY TIME popup window DELAY TIME popup window 1 2 Using the ENTER & NEXT button enables you to set the delay time for each channel consecutively. a Channel select +/− buttons Indicates the currently-selected channel. Press the + button to select the next channel. Press the - button to select the previous channel. b ENTER & NEXT button Press this button to confirm the delay time setting, and then move to the next channel.
CH Parameter > Using SENDS TO Using SENDS TO By using SENDS TO, you can specify the sends to a specific MIX or MATRIX bus for 12 channels at a time. 1 Press the [VIEW] key to access the OVERVIEW screen. 2 Use the MIX/MATRIX SENDS [MIX]/[MATRIX] keys to switch the type of senddestination bus. 3 Use the MIX/MATRIX SENDS [1-12]/[13-24]/[25-36]/[37-48]/[49-60]/[61-72] keys to select a bank of send-destination buses.
CH Parameter > Using SENDS TO NOTE ( ( 7 This allows you to flexibly select the send point for each channel (“SEND POINT (INPUT) (Specifying the send point for each input channel)” (p.327)). Use the SEND LEVEL knob to adjust the send level. Use the SEND LEVEL knob to adjust the send level.
CH Parameter > Using SENDS FROM Using SENDS FROM By using SENDS FROM, you can specify the sends from a specific channel to the MIX or MATRIX buses for 12 channels at a time. 1 Press the [VIEW] key to access the OVERVIEW screen. 2 Press the MIX popup button or the MATRIX popup button. The SENDS FROM popup window appears. 3 Use the SEND ON button to switch on/off the signal that is sent from the currentlyselected channel to the MIX or MATRIX bus.
CH Parameter > MIX/MATRIX SEND section(CS-R10, CSR10- S, CSD-R7) MIX/MATRIX SEND section(CS-R10, CSR10- S, CSD-R7) a MIX/MATRIX SENDS knobs Adjust the send levels for the corresponding buses. b MIX/MATRIX SENDS [PRE] keys Toggle the send point between PRE and POST. If a key lights up, the send point is set to PRE. c MIX/MATRIX SENDS [ON] keys Switch the send signal to the corresponding bus on or off. d MIX/MATRIX SENDS display Indicates the corresponding bus.
CH Parameter > MIX/MATRIX SEND section(CS-R10, CSR10- S, CSD-R7) f MIX/MATRIX SENDS [1-12]/[13-24]/[25-36]/[37-48]/[49-60]/[61-72] keys Selects a bank for the send destination bus.
CH Parameter > Using the Selected Channel section to make send level settings(CS-R10, CSR10- S, CSD-R7) Using the Selected Channel section to make send level settings(CS-R10, CSR10- S, CSD-R7) You can use the knobs of the Selected Channel section to adjust the send levels. 1 Verify that an output port is assigned to the MIX/MATRIX bus to which the signal is sent, and that the corresponding output port is connected to the monitor system or an external effect processor.
CH Parameter > SENDS TO popup window SENDS TO popup window 3 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 This screen contains the following items. a ALL PRE button Sets the send point to “PRE” for all send sources (input channels, MIX channels, STEREO channels) of the selected send destination. At this time, the PRE button (5) will light up. b ALL POST button Sets the send point to “POST” for all send sources (input channels, MIX channels, STEREO channels) of the selected send destination.
CH Parameter > SENDS TO popup window f SEND ON button Switches send on/off for each send-source channel. g FOLLOW setting buttons Enable you to set parameters for signals routed from input channels to the MIX/MATRIX bus so that the parameters will follow the FADER/ON/DCA settings. h SEND PAN/BALANCE knob Adjusts the pan or balance when the send-destination bus is stereo. If the send destination is monaural or is set to FIXED, this knob does not appear.
CH Parameter > SENDS FROM popup window SENDS FROM popup window 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 This screen contains the following items. a Send-source select button Indicates the currently-selected send source. You can use the –/+ buttons at left and right to switch to adjacent channels. You can use the << / >> buttons to switch in steps of 12 channels. This indication is linked with the onscreen selected channel. b Bus indication Shows the send-destination bus.
CH Parameter > SENDS FROM popup window g SEND LEVEL knob Adjusts the send level to the corresponding bus. If the send-destination bus is set to FIXED, this knob will not be shown.
CH Parameter > Using the faders to adjust the sends (SENDS ON FADER mode) Using the faders to adjust the sends (SENDS ON FADER mode) You can use the top panel faders to adjust the signals that are sent from a specific channel to the MIX/MATRIX buses. 1 Verify that an output port is assigned to the MIX/MATRIX bus to which the signal is sent, and that the corresponding output port is connected to the monitor system or an external effect.
CH Parameter > Using the faders to adjust the sends (SENDS ON FADER mode) NOTE If you press the × button in the upper right of the screen, SENDS ON FADER mode will be maintained when you close the screen. To exit SENDS ON FADER mode, perform step 7.
CH Parameter > SENDS ON FADER popup window SENDS ON FADER popup window 2 3 1 4 This screen contains the following items. a SEND TO indication Indicates the currently-selected send destination. This is linked with the on-screen selected channel/parameter. b Tabs Switch between MIX and MATRIX. c MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons You can press a button to select the send destination. This is linked with the on-screen selected channel/parameter.
CH Parameter > Using the Touch Screen section to make send level settings (CS-R5, CS-R3) Using the Touch Screen section to make send level settings (CS-R5, CS-R3) Adjust the send level using the touch screen and knob. Bay L Bay C Bay R 1 2 3 4 a Touch screen This is a touch screen that you can operate Use the screen to select menus or set parameters. b [ASSIGN] key Displays a screen that enables you to specify the send destination bus and switch to the USER DEFINED KNOB function.
CH Parameter > Using the Touch Screen section to make send level settings (CS-R5, CS-R3) d SEND / USER DEFINED knob Adjusts the send level for the corresponding bus while the SEND function is enabled. Enables you to control the assigned function while the USER DEFINED KNOB function is enabled. 1 Verify that an output port is assigned to the MIX/MATRIX bus to which the signal is sent, and that the corresponding output port is connected to the monitor system or an external effect processor.
CH Parameter > SENDS/USER DEFINED KNOB popup window SENDS/USER DEFINED KNOB popup window 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 This screen contains the following items. a SENDS/USER DEFINED KNOBS selection buttons When making SENDS settings or USER DEFINED knob settings, this switches between the two. b Selected channel This area shows the number, name, icon, and channel color of the channel that is currently selected for operation. Press the left side of the selected channel area to select the preceding channel.
CH Parameter > SENDS/USER DEFINED KNOB popup window f SEND channel area Displays the send level and pan for 12 channels. The send level and pan for the selected bus can be operated using the SEND/USER DEFINED knob or the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. You can also operate these controls by tapping on the touch screen. NOTE When the selected channel is an input channel or a MIX bus, you can select the send level going to the send-destination MIX bus/MATRIX bus from the selected channel/MIX bus.
CH Parameter > Using the Quick data copy function Using the Quick data copy function This copies parameters from the desired channel to multiple channels. This is useful for getting ready efficiently. The parameters that can be copied include send level, send on/off, pan/balance, send point, EQ and dynamics type, and FOLLOW settings. ( ( ( ( ( ( Send level This copies the send level from a desired input channel to the send levels going to multiple MIX or MATRIX buses from multiple input channels.
CH Parameter > Operating the Quick Data Copy function from the OVERVIEW screen or SENDS TO/SENDS FROM popup windows Operating the Quick Data Copy function from the OVERVIEW screen or SENDS TO/SENDS FROM popup windows The controls and corresponding parameters are shown below.
CH Parameter > PARAMETER COPY popup window PARAMETER COPY popup window 1 2 3 2 4 3 4 6 5 This window contains the following items. a Copy source display Indicates the copy source channel (as well as the send-destination bus) and its parameter values. b Copy destination selection knob Selects the copy destination channel (or the send-destination bus). c SELECT ALL button Sets all channels (or send-destination buses) as the copy destination.
CH Parameter > Operating the Quick Data Copy function from the HPF/EQ and DYNAMICS 1/2 popup windows Operating the Quick Data Copy function from the HPF/ EQ and DYNAMICS 1/2 popup windows The controls and corresponding parameters are shown below. Screen/window Control Parameter HPF/EQ popup window EQ type select button EQ type DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window Dynamics processor type button Dynamics processor type INSERT/D.OUT popup window (12CH/ FOLLOW setting buttons D.
CH Parameter > PARAMETER SET popup window PARAMETER SET popup window 1 3 2 4 6 5 This window contains the following items. a Copy source type Displays the type to copy. You can switch the type as needed. b Copy destination selection knob Selects the copy destination channel number. c SELECT ALL button Sets all channels as the copy destination. d REVERT button Clears the SELECT ALL button settings. e EXECUTE button Copies the parameter and closes the window/screen.
CH Parameter > Operating the Quick Data Copy function from the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW and TO STEREO popup windows Operating the Quick Data Copy function from the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW and TO STEREO popup windows The controls and corresponding parameters are shown below. Screen/window Control Parameter TO ST field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW window TO ST A/B button TO STEREO popup window 1 STEREO A/B on/off On the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW window, press the TO ST A/B button while holding the [SHIFT] key.
CH Parameter > PARAMETER SET popup window PARAMETER SET popup window 1 3 2 4 This window contains the following items. a Set parameter Selects the parameter (ON/OFF) to set. b Setting destination selection knob Selects the channel number for the parameter to set. c SELECT ALL button Sets all channels as the copy destination. d REVERT button Clears the SELECT ALL button settings.
CH Parameter > Controlling via the TO STEREO section Controlling via the TO STEREO section The TO STEREO buses are used for outputting signals to the main speakers. 1 Verify that an input source is connected to the channel that you are controlling, and set the head amp’s phantom power, gain, and phase to obtain the optimal input signal.
CH Parameter > TO STEREO section TO STEREO section 1 a 2 TO ST [A]/[B] keys Switch on or off the signal sent from the input channel to stereo bus A or B. b [PAN/BAL] knob Sets the panning/balance of the signal sent to the stereo buses.
CH Parameter > ST mode and LCR mode ST mode and LCR mode The STEREO buses are used for outputting signals to the main speakers. Signals can be sent to a STEREO bus in one of two modes, ST mode or LCR mode, and you can make this selection individually for each channel. These modes differ in the following ways. ST mode This method allows an input channel or MIX channel to individually send independent signals to the STEREO A bus and STEREO B bus.
CH Parameter > ST mode and LCR mode NOTE ( ( When using LCR mode, set STEREO B to MONO. STEREO B is used as the CENTER channel.
CH Parameter > Sending a signal to a STEREO bus Sending a signal to a STEREO bus 1 Verify that an input source is connected to the channel that you are controlling, and set the head amp’s phantom power, gain, and phase to obtain the optimal input signal.
CH Parameter > Sending a signal to a STEREO bus 6 In the channel strip section of the top panel, verify that the [ON] key is turned on for the STEREO channel that you want to operate, and then raise the fader to an appropriate position.
CH Parameter > TO STEREO popup window TO STEREO popup window 1 2 3 4 6 5 1 This screen contains the following items. a Channel select button Indicates the channel. Press this button to select the on-screen selected channel. The current channel icon, number, and color appear on the button, and the channel name appears below the button. b ST/LCR mode select button Press this to switch the mode between ST and LCR. The currently-selected mode is displayed with emphasis.
CH Parameter > TO STEREO popup window f ∑ clipping indicator This indicator lights to indicate that a signal is clipping at some point in the channel. NOTE This is also shown for MATRIX channels that do not have a stereo send If the ST/LCR mode select button is set to LCR mode, the following button and knob will be shown instead of the TO ST A button (c) and TO ST B button (d). 7 8 g LCR button Switches on/off all signals sent from the channel to the STEREO bus.
CH Parameter > TO STEREO popup window j PAN/BALANCE select button This button selects whether the volume balance (BALANCE) or the pan (PAN) of the signal sent to the STEREO bus will be adjusted.
CH Parameter > Signal flow Signal flow A signal flow window enables you to view the entire signal flow of a single channel. You can also specify the insert points, delay point, and direct out point in this window. In addition, you can view the location within the signal flow at which clipping may have occurred. 1 Press the [VIEW] key to access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. → 2 Press the SIGNAL FLOW popup button. The“SIGNAL FLOW popup window” (p.565) appears. 3 4 Review the signal flow.
CH Parameter > SIGNAL FLOW popup window SIGNAL FLOW popup window 1 2 3 4 This window contains the following items. a Insert point select buttons Enable you to select insert points. The following indicators indicate the status of the corresponding insert point: A plug-in, GEQ/PEQ, or outboard unit is inserted at the insert point. Bypassed.
CH Parameter > SIGNAL FLOW popup window b Level meters These meters indicate the levels at various points in the signal flow. Levels are detected at the following locations. INPUT ( GC GAIN OUT (immediately after the analog gain) ( D.
Channel Job > About DCA/Mute groups library Channel Job About DCA/Mute groups library The RIVAGE PM series provides 24 DCAs and 12 mute groups. A group name can be assigned to each DCA and mute group. DCA DCA 1 – 24 can be used with both input channels and output channels. Both types of channel can exist in the same group. NOTE DCA settings can be saved and recalled using the dedicated library.
Channel Job > About DCA About DCA The RIVAGE PM series features 24 DCAs that enable you to control the level of multiple channels simultaneously. It includes the following features: ( DCA1–24 can be used for all input channels and all output channels. ( Both input channels and output channels can be assigned to the same group at the same time. ( All channels assigned to a DCA can be cued simultaneously.
Channel Job > Assigning channels to a DCA (Selecting the channels that will belong to a specific DCA) Assigning channels to a DCA (Selecting the channels that will belong to a specific DCA) 1 Press the CH JOB button on the menu bar, and then select DCA GROUP ASSIGN. When you select DCA GROUP ASSIGN, the DCA/MUTE ASSIGN window (ALL DCA) appears. 2 3 Use the DCA select buttons to select the DCA to which you want to assign channels. Press the DCA assign popup field.
Channel Job > Assigning channels to a DCA (Selecting the DCAs to which a specific channel will belong) Assigning channels to a DCA (Selecting the DCAs to which a specific channel will belong) 1 Press the DCA/MUTE ASSIGN field on the OVERVIEW screen, or press the DCA/MUTE ASSIGN field on the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. DCA/MUTE ASSIGN field DCA/MUTE ASSIGN field on the OVERVIEW screen The DCA/MUTE ASSIGN (1CH) popup window appears.
Channel Job > Using DCAs Using DCAs 1 2 Assign input channels and output channels to a DCA. 3 4 Press to illuminate the [DCA] key so that you will be able to control the DCA. Using the faders in the Channel Strip section of the top panel, adjust the relative balance between the input channels and output channels that belong to the DCA you want to use. In the Channel Strip section, operate the fader corresponding to the DCA you want to use.
Channel Job > Viewing the list of DCA status on the OVERVIEW screen Viewing the list of DCA status on the OVERVIEW screen The OVERVIEW screen enables you to view the list of DCA status and make Recall Safe and other settings. Press the [VIEW] key to switch to the OVERVIEW screen, and then press the [DCA] key on the top panel to select the DCA layer. 1 2 3 a ISO button If this button is on, the selected DCA will be unaffected by scene/library recall operations (Isolate mode). b R.
Channel Job > Using DCAs Using DCAs Use the Channel Strip section to control the DCAs. Level adjustment: fader You can adjust the level of the channels assigned to that DCA while preserving the relative level differences among the channels. The channel fader operation will not be linked at this time.
Channel Job > DCA ROLL-OUT DCA ROLL-OUT All channels assigned to a DCA can be temporarily recalled (rolled out) to other bays and controlled individually. You can use the Preferences settings to change how the channels will rolled out. DCA ROLL-OUT operation 1 2 Press the [DCA] key on the top panel to select the DCA layer. Press the [SEL] key for the DCA you want to roll out. The corresponding channels will be rolled out on the panel according to the DCA ROLL-OUT setting in PREFERENCES.
Channel Job > DCA GROUP ASSIGN window (ALL DCA) DCA GROUP ASSIGN window (ALL DCA) 7 8 1 2 3 5 4 6 a Tabs Use these tabs to select 1CH, ALL DCA, or ALL MUTE window. b DCA select buttons Enable you to select a target DCA. c NAME EDIT popup button Indicates the name of the currently-selected DCA. Press this button to display the keyboard window or icon edit window, in which you can edit the DCA name.
Channel Job > DCA ASSIGN popup window DCA ASSIGN popup window 1 a 2 3 45 1 2 Switching tabs Enable you to switch between the input channel page and output channel page. b Channel select buttons Enable you to select the channels that will be assigned to a DCA. c SET BY SEL button If this button is on, you will be able to select a channel by using the corresponding [SEL] key. d CLEAR ALL button Press this button to clear all selections.
Channel Job > DCA/MUTE ASSIGN window (1CH) DCA/MUTE ASSIGN window (1CH) This window enables you to view and edit the DCAs to which each channel is assigned. 1 a 2 3 Tabs Use these tabs to select 1CH, ALL DCA, or ALL MUTE window. b Channel select +/– buttons Indicates the currently-selected channel. Press the + button to select the next channel. Press the - button to select the previous channel. c DCA ASSIGN buttons Press a button to assign the selected channel to the corresponding DCA.
Channel Job > About mute groups About mute groups The RIVAGE PM series features twelve mute groups. It includes the following features: ( Mute groups 1–12 can be used for all input channels and all output channels. ( Both input channels and output channels can be assigned to the same group at the same time. ( You can temporarily defeat the muted state of an individual channel. ( You can also assign the Mute Master function to a USER DEFINED key.
Channel Job > Assigning channels to a mute group (Selecting the channels that will belong to a specific mute group) Assigning channels to a mute group (Selecting the channels that will belong to a specific mute group) 1 Press the CH JOB button on the menu bar, and then select MUTE GROUP ASSIGN. When you select MUTE GROUP ASSIGN, the “MUTE GROUP ASSIGN window (ALL MUTE)” (p.583) appears. 2 Use the MUTE GROUP 1–12 buttons to select the mute group to which you want to assign channels.
Channel Job > Assigning channels to a mute group (Selecting the channels that will belong to a specific mute group) NOTE ( ( You may assign a single channel to more than one mute group. If the dimmer level is set to any level other than –∞ dB, these indicators will light orange.
Channel Job > Assigning channels to a mute group (Selecting the mute group to which a specific channel will belong) Assigning channels to a mute group (Selecting the mute group to which a specific channel will belong) 1 Press the DCA/MUTE ASSIGN field on the OVERVIEW screen, or press the DCA/MUTE ASSIGN field on the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. DCA/MUTE ASSIGN field DCA/MUTE ASSIGN field on the OVERVIEW screen The “DCA/MUTE ASSIGN window (1CH)” (p.585) appears.
Channel Job > Temporarily defeating the Mute function Temporarily defeating the Mute function Temporarily defeating the Mute function You can temporarily defeat the Mute function for specific channels in a mute group by pressing the corresponding channel [ON] keys. This is possible only when [ON] KEYS BEHAVIOR DURING MUTE is enabled in the Preferences settings.
Channel Job > MUTE GROUP ASSIGN window (ALL MUTE) MUTE GROUP ASSIGN window (ALL MUTE) 8 9 1 2 6 3 7 4 5 a MUTE group and MUTE SAFE buttons Enable you to select a mute group or Mute Safe to which you want to assign channels. b NAME EDIT button Press this button to access a keyboard window, in which you can enter the mute group name. c Mute group assign field This area displays the channels assigned to the currently-selected mute group.
Channel Job > MUTE GROUP ASSIGN window (ALL MUTE) f CLEAR ALL button Press this button to clear all selections. g SET BY SEL button If this button is on, you will be able to add a channel by using the corresponding [SEL] key. To select more channels, turn the SET BY SEL button on, and then press the corresponding [SEL] keys for the desired channels. h LIBRARY button Press this button to open the MUTE NAME/ASSIGN library window.
Channel Job > DCA/MUTE ASSIGN window (1CH) DCA/MUTE ASSIGN window (1CH) This window enables you to view and edit the mute groups to which each channel is assigned. 1 2 3 a Tabs Use these tabs to select 1CH, ALL DCA, or ALL MUTE window. b Channel select +/– buttons Indicates the currently-selected channel. Press the + button to select the next channel. Press the - button to select the previous channel.
Channel Job > Channel link Channel link Channel link is a function that links the operations (such as fader movements or EQ parameters) of input channels or output channels. Two or more channels that are linked are called a link group. You can create up to 52 link groups for input channels and up to 52 link groups for output channels. The type of parameters to be linked can be individually selected for each link group. However, input channels and output channels cannot coexist in a single link group.
Channel Job > Channel link operations Channel link operations Channel link operations ( ( ( ( Linking three or more channels Hold down the [SEL] key of the link-source, and successively press the [SEL] keys of the input channels that you want to add to the link group. Adding new channels to an existing link group Hold down any [SEL] key within the group, and press the [SEL] keys that you want to add to the group.
Channel Job > CH LINK popup window CH LINK popup window 3 1 4 5 2 a INPUT/OUTPUT buttons These buttons switch between the input channel page and output channel page. b Channel select buttons Use these buttons to select the channels that you want to link. Linked channels will show an alphabetical character that indicates the link group. NOTE ( ( ( ( When you select a linked channel, all channels of the same group are selected.
Channel Job > Temporary link Temporary link The Temporary link function enables you to link multiple channels temporarily so that you can simultaneously change the settings for only the parameters of the linked channels. This useful function enables you to adjust parameters in real time and more quickly than a copy or recall operation, if you want to apply fader operations or EQ adjustments to multiple channels quickly. This link is not permanent, and only one group of channels can be linked.
Channel Job > Configuring a temporary channel link Configuring a temporary channel link Press and hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the [SEL] key. Alternatively, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the channel name area located at the bottom of the OVERVIEW screen. The [SEL] keys for the specified channels will flash. The meter area, and the channel name areas in the OVERVIEW screen will be marked by a yellow frame and a link icon.
Channel Job > Copying channel parameters Copying channel parameters You can copy channel mix parameter settings to other channels. When the copy operation is executed, the parameter settings will overwrite those of the copy destination. You can copy parameter settings between the following channel combinations. ( Between input channels ( Between MIX channels ( Between MATRIX channels ( Between Stereo A and B NOTE Analog HA, patch, channel name, and phantom settings will not be copied.
Channel Job > Copying channel parameters 5 To close the CH COPY popup window, press the CLOSE button.
Channel Job > CH COPY popup window CH COPY popup window You can register and use eight patterns for the input and output respectively.
Channel Job > CH COPY popup window a Preset button Enables you to select the preset in which you registered the parameter to copy. Press the selected preset button once more to open the INPUT (OUTPUT) “CH COPY PRESET popup window” (p.595), where you can select the parameters to register in the preset. The settings of the preset button b at bottom right are also used as parameter settings that are copied when the “PASTE” key in the Selected Channel section of the panel is pressed.
Channel Job > CH COPY PRESET popup window CH COPY PRESET popup window INPUT CH COPY PRESET popup window 1 2 3 OUTPUT CH COPY PRESET popup window 1 2 3 This window contains the following items.
Channel Job > CH COPY PRESET popup window a NAME EDIT button Press this button to display the NAME EDIT popup window, where you can edit the preset name. b Parameter buttons Turn this on to register the parameters in the preset. c WITH PLUGINS button Turn this on to include the plugins inserted into the channel, the patches and the parameters into the content to be copied. d WITH SENDS button Turn this on to include all SEND settings (ON/OFF and level, pan, etc.
Channel Job > Moving channel parameters Moving channel parameters You can move the settings of a specific input channel to a different input channel. When you execute a move, the channels between the move-source and move-destination are renumbered forward or backward. NOTE The channel insert assignment (INSERT OUT (1C)) settings of the SYSTEM CONFIG [DSP] popup window will not move. 1 Press the CH JOB button on the menu bar, and then select CH MOVE.
Channel Job > Moving channel parameters 5 ( Press the OK button. When you execute CH MOVE, the audio might be interrupted in some cases. 6 To close the CH MOVE popup window, press the CLOSE button. About CH MOVE If the channels being moved include channels that are located before the move-destination channels, they are moved after the move-destination channels.
Channel Job > CH MOVE popup window CH MOVE popup window 7 2 1 3 4 6 5 a FROM button This button is automatically selected when the CH MOVE popup window opens. Press this button if you want to select a different move-source channel. b TO button Switches to a mode in which you can select the move-destination. c MOVE button After specifying the move-source and destination channels, press this button to execute the channel move operation.
Channel Job > Initializing channel parameters Initializing channel parameters You can restore the parameters of a channel to an initialized state. This operation can be performed on any channel(s). NOTE Analog HA, channel name, patch, and Recall Safe settings will not be initialized. 1 Press the CH JOB button on the menu bar, and then select CH DEFAULT. When you select CH DEFAULT, the CH DEFAULT popup window will appear. When you select CH DEFAULT, the “CH DEFAULT popup window” (p.601) will appear.
Channel Job > CH DEFAULT popup window CH DEFAULT popup window 1 2 5 4 3 a DEFAULT button After selecting the channel, press this button to execute the initialization operation. b Channel display select buttons Select the type of channels that you want to view on screen. Available options include CH1-72, CH73-144, MIX, and ST/MATRIX. c ASSIGN section Enables you to select the channels for which you want to restore parameters to their initial values.
Channel Job > Parameters to be copied Parameters to be copied The parameters to be copied are shown below.
Channel Job > Parameters to be copied Copy source Copy destination AutoMixer Open channels will be assigned (parameters will not be copied) OutBoard Copy destination is changed to OutBoard (no patching) Effect When the copy source is a Dual type, copy and patch (including the parameters and bypass). When the copy source is a Normal type*1, copy and patch the L side (including the parameters and bypass).
Channel Job > Parameters to be copied Copy source Copy destination Effect When the copy source is a Stereo type, replace with Dual type, and copy and patch (including the parameters and bypass). When the copy source is a Normal type*1, copy and patch the L side (including the parameters and bypass).
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > Graphic EQ, parametric EQ and Automixer GEQ/PEQ/Automixer Graphic EQ, parametric EQ and Automixer The RIVAGE PM series features 31BandGEQ, Flex15GEQ, 8BandPEQ and Automixer. Each type can be used by inserting it in an insert point.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > About using a graphic EQ (GEQ) About using a graphic EQ (GEQ) 31BandGEQ This is a monaural 31-band GEQ. The bands have a width of 1/3 octave, and the gain can be adjusted in the range of ±15 dB for each of the 31 bands. Flex15GEQ This is a monaural 15-band GEQ. Each band is 1/3 octave wide, and the adjustable gain range is ±15 dB. The Flex15GEQ enables you to adjust the gain for any fifteen of the same bands as the thirty-one bands of the 31bandGEQ.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > About using a parametric EQ (PEQ) About using a parametric EQ (PEQ) 8BandPEQ This is a monaural 8-band PEQ. It also features four notch filters. The PEQ features a 1/12 oct (121-band) Real Time Analyzer (also called spectrum analyzer). NOTE Notch filters A–D are independent of the PEQ, and thus not affected by the PEQ’s BYPASS buttons. You can bypass the PEQ and use only the notch filters.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > About Automixer About Automixer Automixer Automixer provides high-clarity sound mixing, and enables you to automatically adjust the microphone input levels when multiple persons are speaking.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > DSP resource management for GEQ DSP resource management for GEQ 384 48 DSP resources for plug-ins DSP resources for GEQ/PEQ Plug-ins and GEQ/PEQ each feature their dedicated DSP resources. DSP resources are consumed each time a plug-in is mounted or a GEQ/PEQ is inserted. DSP resources usable by plug-ins are divided into 384 units, and the DSP resources that are usable by GEQ/PEQ are divided into 48 units.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > DSP resource management for GEQ b GEQ position bar Indicates the location of the page associated with the current display of the GEQ allocation field. c Page select knob Use the corresponding screen encoder or the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select a page to view.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > Inserting a GEQ/PEQ into a channel via the Selected Channel section Inserting a GEQ/PEQ into a channel via the Selected Channel section This section explains how to insert a GEQ/PEQ into the selected channel for use. 1 a 2 INSERT [PLUG-INS] key Enables you to recall a parameter setting screen for the inserted plug-in. b INSERT 1/2 [ON] keys Switch INSERT1 and INSERT2 on or off respectively. 1 2 Select the channel that you want to operate. Press the INSERT [PLUG-INS] key.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > Inserting a GEQ/PEQ into a channel via the Selected Channel section 4 Press the MOUNT popup button to access the MOUNT popup window. 5 Press the GEQ/PEQ tab. The MOUNT GEQ/PEQ popup window appears. 6 Use the MODULE SELECT buttons to select the item you want to insert, and then press the OK button. The GEQ_ASSIGNMENT popup window will appear. 7 Rotate the GEQ/PEQ allocation knob to specify the location for GEQ/PEQ (indicated in a pink frame).
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > INSERT screen INSERT screen 1 2 3 This screen contains the following items. a INSERT 1/2 switch buttons Switches between INSERT1 and INSERT2. b INSERT block [A]–[D] buttons Indicate four plug-ins that have been assigned to INSERT1 and INSERT2 respectively. Press this button to display the edit screen for the assigned plug-in. c MOUNT popup button Press this button to display the MOUNT screen.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > The MOUNT GEQ/PEQ screen The MOUNT GEQ/PEQ screen 1 3 2 4 5 This screen contains the following items. a BLANK button Defeat the currently-inserted GEQ/PEQ. b Used slots indicator Indicates the number of slots that are being used. c MODULE SELECT Use these buttons to select the GEQ or PEQ that will be inserted. Each button has the following function. d ( 31BandGEQ button.....Inserts a 31BandGEQ in the specified channel. ( Flex15GEQ button.....
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > GEQ ASSIGNMENT popup window GEQ ASSIGNMENT popup window 1 3 2 This window contains the following items. a GEQ/PEQ allocation field Indicates the GEQ/PEQ allocation status. You can view 48 available DSP resources at a glance. A location to which you can allocate GEQ/PEQ is indicated in a pink frame. A gray frame means a GEQ/PEQ cannot be allocated to that location. b GEQ/PEQ allocation knob Allocates GEQ/PEQ. You can also allocate them by tapping the touch screens.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > Inserting a GEQ/PEQ into a channel via the OVERVIEW screen Inserting a GEQ/PEQ into a channel via the OVERVIEW screen 1 Press the [VIEW] key to access the OVERVIEW screen. INSERT/DIRECT OUT field OVERVIEW screen 2 Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field of the channel into which you want to insert the GEQ/PEQ. The INSERT/D.OUT popup window (1CH) will appear. a INSERT block [A]–[D] buttons Indicate four plug-ins that have been assigned to INSERT1 and INSERT2 respectively.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > Inserting a GEQ/PEQ into a channel via the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) Inserting a GEQ/PEQ into a channel via the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) 1 2 Select the channel that you want to operate. Press the [VIEW] key to access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. INSET field SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen 3 Press the INSERT field to access the INSERT screen.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > Inserting a GEQ/PEQ into a channel via the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) 4 Follow steps 4–8 under Inserting a GEQ/PEQ into a channel via the Selected Channel section.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > Using the 31BandGEQ Using the 31BandGEQ 1 Follow steps 1–8 under Inserting a GEQ/PEQ into a channel via the Selected Channel section, insert the 31BandGEQ into a channel. The system displays the “GEQ/PEQ EDIT screen” (p.621) that you inserted. 2 If you are using a stereo source, link two GEQ units. When you press the GEQ LINK button, the following popup window will appear. To enable linking, press any button other than CANCEL. The popup window contains the following items.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > Using the 31BandGEQ 4 Press one of the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field to select the group of bands you will control using the faders in the Channel Strip section. The buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field correspond to the following groups of bands. 20-250: Twelve bands within 20.0Hz–250Hz 80-1k: Twelve bands within 80.0Hz–1.00 kHz 250-3.15k: Twelve bands within 250Hz–3.15 kHz 1.6k-20k: Twelve bands within 1.60kHz–20.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > GEQ/PEQ EDIT screen GEQ/PEQ EDIT screen 2 $ % 1 ^ & 3 * 4 5 6 8 7 9 ) @ ! This screen contains the following items. a MOUNT GEQ/PEQ popup button Press this button to access the MOUNT GEQ/PEQ popup window. b EQ graph Indicates the approximate current response of the 31BandGEQ. c GEQ LINK button Press this button to access the GEQ LINK window, in which you can link the GEQ of paired channels. NOTICE ( d The GEQ LINK button appears only for paired GEQs.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > GEQ/PEQ EDIT screen g RTA button If this button is on, a semi-opaque frequency analysis graph of the input signal (immediately after EQ) will be superimposed on top of the EQ frequency response graph. h PEAK HOLD If this button is on, the analyzed frequency response graph will hold the peak level indication. i HOLD button If this button is on, the frequency response graph will indicate and hold the result of the frequency analysis.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > Using the Flex15GEQ Using the Flex15GEQ You can use faders 1–12 and [ON] keys in the Channel Strip section to control the Flex15GEQ. 1 Follow steps 1–8 under Inserting a GEQ/PEQ into a channel via the Selected Channel section, insert the Flex15GEQ into a channel. The system displays the EDIT screen for the GEQ/PEQ that you inserted.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > Using the Flex15GEQ 4 Raise the corresponding fader of the Channel Strip section. For each of a Flex15GEQ’s two GEQ units (A and B), a maximum of fifteen bands can be controlled. The real-time number of additional bands that can be controlled is shown to the right of “AVAILABLE BANDS" in the FADER ASSIGN field. If you have used all fifteen bands, you will have to return one of these bands to the flat position before you can operate any other band.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > Using the 8BandPEQ Using the 8BandPEQ 1 Follow steps 1–8 under Inserting a GEQ/PEQ into a channel via the Selected Channel section, insert the 8BandGEQ into a channel. The system displays the p.626 that you inserted. 2 If you are using a stereo source, link two GEQ units. When you press the GEQ LINK button, the following popup window will appear. To enable linking, press any button other than CANCEL. The popup window contains the following items.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > GEQ/PEQ EDIT screen (8BandPEQ) GEQ/PEQ EDIT screen (8BandPEQ) 1 2 3 4 This screen contains the following items. a EQ type select button Switches the EQ type to PRECISE, AGGRESSIVE, SMOOTH, or LEGACY. b PEQ graph Displays the parameter values for the PEQ and filters. c PEQ LINK button Press this button to access the PEQ LINK window, in which you can link the PEQ of paired channels. d FLAT button Press this button to reset the GAIN parameters of all PEQ bands to 0 dB.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > GEQ/PEQ EDIT screen (8BandPEQ) i PEAK HOLD If this button is on, the analyzed frequency response graph will hold the peak level indication. j BALLISTICS field ( BALLISTICS button If this button is on, you will be able to add rate of decay to the analyzed frequency response graph. ( AST/SLOW switch button Switches the decay rate of graph rendering (FAST/SLOW). k EQ IN/OUT level meters Indicate the peak level of signals before and after the EQ.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > GEQ/PEQ EDIT screen (8BandPEQ) w COMPARE button Press this button to switch between the current PEQ settings and the data in buffer memory. If valid data has not been copied into buffer memory, you will be unable to compare the data.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > About Automixer About Automixer Automixer detects effective audio from multiple microphones and automatically optimizes the gain distribution for multiple live microphones in unpredictable dialog situations. In this way, the sound engineer can maintain consistent system gain throughout multiple microphones without having to focus on the operation of multiple faders.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > Theory of Automixer operation Theory of Automixer operation Automixer employs the Dugan Speech System, which automatically adjusts the automix gain of up to 64 live speech microphones.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > Inserting Automixer into a channel Inserting Automixer into a channel 1 Press the RACK&REC button on the menu bar to access the RACK&REC screen. This screen includes several pages, which you can switch between using the tabs located at the top of the screen. 2 Press the GEQ RACK tab on the RACK&REC screen that displays GEQs. The “GEQ RACK screen” (p.632) appears. 3 Press the GEQ MOUNT popup button. NOTE You can mount Automixer only to GEQ1. The “GEQ MOUNT popup window” (p.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > GEQ RACK screen GEQ RACK screen 1 This screen contains the following items. a GEQ MOUNT popup button Press this button to display the GEQ MOUNT popup window, in which you can select a plug-in to mount.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > GEQ MOUNT popup window GEQ MOUNT popup window 1 2 3 NOTE The GEQ MOUNT popup window is displayed on only one of the bays. This screen contains the following items. a BLANK button Unmounts the GEQ/PEQ/Automixer from the rack. b GEQ/PEQ/Automixer select buttons Select the GEQ/PEQ/Automixer that will be mounted in the rack. c GEQ/PEQ DSP USAGE indication Shows the state of GEQ/PEQ resource usage.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > GEQ RACK screen GEQ RACK screen 2 This screen contains the following items. a 1 INPUT popup button Press these buttons to access the INPUT PATCH popup window, in which you can select a signal to patch to the channel. b OUTPUT popup buttons Press these buttons to access the OUTPUT PATCH popup window, in which you can select a signal to patch to the channel.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > Controlling the Automixer parameters Controlling the Automixer parameters 1 2 3 4 5 This window contains the following items. ■ Master field a MOUNT popup button Press this button to display the GEQ MOUNT popup window. b Channel display select buttons These buttons contains the auto mix gain meters and mode indicators: man[ual] (yellow), auto (green), or mute (red) for each channel. Press one of these buttons to select channels to be displayed in the channel control field below.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > Controlling the Automixer parameters d meters button Switches the meter indicators displayed in the channel control field. Pressing the button repeatedly will switch among gain (auto mix gain), input (input level), and output (output level). NOTICE ( e “gain” is the most useful choice during normal operations. reset button Initializes the Automixer settings. ■ Channel control field Each channel is always in man, auto, or mute mode.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > Controlling the Automixer parameters c weight The weight controls balance relative sensitivity of the input channels. Balance the weight controls so that the auto mix gain meters will display approximately equal levels when no one is talking. For example, if there is ongoing noise near one microphone (e.g., computer fan or air vent), suppress it by reducing that channel’s weight. To change the channel’s weight level, use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to manipulate the weight slider.
GEQ/PEQ/Automixer > Controlling the Automixer parameters h man/auto/mute buttons Pressing each button repeatedly toggles the corresponding mode on and off. man: There is no automixing, and the audio signal passes through at unity gain. Use this mode for singing through a microphone. auto: Auto mixing is turned on. Use this mode for dialog. mute: The channel’s output is muted.
Plug-ins > About plug-ins Plug-ins About plug-ins Plug-ins can be used by inserting them into a channel, or via send or return. The RIVAGE PM series provides 50 types of plug-in, including the Rupert EQ 773 and Rupert Comp 830 designed in a collaboration with Rupert Neve Designs, and the VSS4HD and NonLin 2 made by TC Electronic. The maximum number of plugins that can be mounted depends on the type of plug-in. For example in the case of the Portico EQ or Portico Comp, up to 192 units can be used.
Plug-ins > About plug-ins CUE A/B LR FOR INSERT INPUT/MIX/MATRIX/ST/MONITOR/CUE INSERT OUT INPUT/MIX/MATRIX/ST/MONITOR/CUE INSERT IN FOR SEND RETURN PLUG-IN MIX/MATRIX INPUT ON PLUG-IN CUE FOR INSERT (例) FOR SEND RETURN (例) MIX 1-72 STEREO A/B MATRIX 1-36 MIX 1-72 INPUT PATCH CH 1-144 INSERT 1 INSERT 2 PLUG-IN MIX 1-72 ST A/B MATRIX 1-36 CH 1 MIX 1 ST A/B PLUG-IN CH 2 OUTPUT PATCH INPUT PATCH PLUG-IN STEREO A/B PLUG-IN PLUG-IN CUE/MONITOR A/B CUE OUTS MON OUTS PLUG-IN Plug-in typ
Plug-ins > About plug-ins Amount of Tap DSP tempo resources function Plug-in type Explanation Early Reflection 1-in/2-out early reflections. 7 - Gate Reverb 1-in/2-out gate reverb. You can choose from two types: Gate Reverb and Reverse Gate. 7 - Mono Delay Basic 1-in/2-out repeat delay. 3 ✓ Stereo Delay Basic 2-in/2-out repeat delay. 3 ✓ Modulation Delay Simple 1-in/2-out repeat delay with modulation. 4 ✓ Delay LCR 1-in/2-out 3-tap delay.
Plug-ins > About plug-ins Plug-in type EQ-1A Amount of Tap DSP tempo resources function Explanation Dual Models a classic vacuum tube passive-type vintage EQ. 3 - Equalizer that emulates the characteristics of an analog equalizer used in the 1970s. It can be used to obtain a sense of drive. 2 - EQ that dynamically changes the gain, allowing the cut/boost amount to be controlled in response to the input level.
Plug-ins > About plug-ins These are shown for the sake of file compatibility with the RIVAGE PM10 series, but will not perform audio processing. They can be changed to another plug-in or unmounted.
Plug-ins > Using plug-ins Using plug-ins This section explains how to use plug-ins. 1 2 Press the RACK&REC button on the menu bar to access the RACK&REC screen. Press the PLUG-IN RACK tab on the RACK&REC screen that displays plug-ins. The “PLUG-IN RACK page of the RACK&REC screen” (p.645) appears. 3 Press the MOUNT popup button. The “RACK MOUNT popup window” (p.646) appears. NOTE The RACK MOUNT popup window is displayed on only one of the bays.
Plug-ins > PLUG-IN RACK page of the RACK&REC screen PLUG-IN RACK page of the RACK&REC screen 1 This screen contains the following items. a 2 MOUNT popup button Press this button to display the RACK MOUNT popup window, in which you can select a plug-in to mount. b Plug-in allocation bar You can view the plug-in allocation status at a glance. c Rack select knob Use the corresponding screen encoder or the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select a rack.
Plug-ins > RACK MOUNT popup window RACK MOUNT popup window 1 3 4 2 This screen contains the following items. a Category select tabs Enable you to select the category of plug-in that will be mounted in the rack. b BLANK button Unmounts the plug-in from the rack. NOTE If you open this window by pressing the MOUNT button on the PLUG-IN RACK page, you will see this BLANK button and be able to select a plug-in to unmount.
Plug-ins > PLUG-IN ASSIGNMENT popup window PLUG-IN ASSIGNMENT popup window 1 3 2 This screen contains the following items. a Plug-in allocation field Indicates the plug-in allocation status. You can view 384 available DSP resources at a glance. A location to which you can allocate the selected plug-in is indicated in a pink frame. A gray frame means you cannot allocate the selected plug-in to that location. b Plug-in allocation knob Allocates plug-ins.
Plug-ins > Plug-in screen Plug-in screen 1 2 3 4 5 This screen contains the following items. a Plug-in allocation number Indicates the locations of plug-ins (expressed by the row name and the column number). b INPUT popup buttons (L/R) Press these buttons to access the INPUT PATCH popup window, in which you can select a signal to patch to the L/R channel. c PARAM SAFE button (L/R) Switches Recall Safe on/off for plug-in parameters.
Plug-ins > Controlling the plug-in parameters Controlling the plug-in parameters ) 5 6 7 8 9 @ 1 2 # 3 $ 4 ! The popup window for each plug-in contains the following items. a % RACK MOUNT popup button Press this button to display the RACK MOUNT popup window, in which you can select a plug-in to mount. b PARAM SAFE button Switches Recall Safe on/off for plug-in parameters.
Plug-ins > Controlling the plug-in parameters h PASTE button Press this button to paste the settings that were copied in buffer memory to the current plug-in. If valid data has not been copied into buffer memory, you will be unable to paste it. i COMPARE button Press this button to switch between the current plug-in settings and data in buffer memory. If valid data has not been copied into buffer memory, you will be unable to compare the data.
Plug-ins > Controlling the plug-in parameters q KEY IN button Press the button to open the KEY IN SOURCE SELECT popup window, in which you can select a key-in signal source.
Plug-ins > Controlling the REV-X plug-in parameters Controlling the REV-X plug-in parameters REV-X is a reverb algorithm that provides a high-density, richly reverberant sound quality, with smooth attenuation, and spread and depth that work together to enhance the original sound. You can choose one of three programs to suit the acoustic sound field and your intentions: REV-X Hall, REV-X Room, and REV-X Plate.
Plug-ins > Controlling the REV-X plug-in parameters d Decay Shape of reverberation envelope. Reverberation characteristics are determined by the value. e Room Size Size of space. Higher values simulate larger spaces. This value is linked with the Reverb Time value. When you change this value, the Reverb Time value changes. f Diffusion Density and spread of reverberation. Higher values increase the density and enhance the spread. g HPF This filter cuts the low frequency range of the reverberation.
Plug-ins > Controlling the REV-X plug-in parameters q Zoom In button Click this button to decrease the time value (in seconds) as displayed by the time axis (horizontal axis). As a result, the display zooms in on the horizontal axis. r MIX slider This control enables you to adjust the mix balance of the dry and wet (effect) sounds. When the balance is 0%, only the dry sound is output. When the balance is 100%, only the wet sound is output.
Plug-ins > Controlling the SP2016 parameters Controlling the SP2016 parameters The SP2016 Reverb is an authentic recreation of the original rack processor from the Eighties. Highly regarded for its signature reverbs, the SP2016 was used in countless hit records for nearly 40 years. The SP2016 Reverb plug-in includes vintage and modern versions of Room, Stereo Room and Hi-Density Plate.
Plug-ins > Controlling the SP2016 parameters e MIX LOCK button When this button is on, the mix balance will not change when the preset is changed. It will be disabled for other operations such as the library recall except for switching between presets. f LED DISPLAY Displays information for the selected program or parameters that are being modified. g BYPASS button Bypasses the effect. h PROGRAM button Switches between programs (algorithms).
Plug-ins > Controlling the SP2016 parameters t HIGH FREQ fader Adjusts the frequency of the high-range EQ (shelving). u HIGH GAIN fader Adjusts the gain of the high-range EQ (shelving). v Parameter text w Indicates the values of the parameters to be operated. Click these values with your mouse to input the values via keyboard.
Plug-ins > Controlling the VSS4HD plug-in parameters Controlling the VSS4HD plug-in parameters VSS4HD is a room simulation reverb made by TC Electronic. It provides musical-sounding reverberation with a variety of reflected sounds. This plug-in includes several pages, which you can switch between using the tabs. (only for DSP-R10) Main page % 1 4 7 2 5 8 ) 3 6 9 ! ^ & ( * A @ B # D C $ a Decay button Adjusts the decay time of the reverb.
Plug-ins > Controlling the VSS4HD plug-in parameters d Pre Delay button Adjusts the delay of the reverb input. e Rev Delay button Adjusts the delay of the reverb tail. f Rev Width button Adjusts the width of the reverb tail. g Decrease button Adjusts the number of reflections for the early reflections. h Lo Color button Adjusts the low-frequency range of the early reflections. i Early Start button Adjusts the first early reflections to eliminate them.
Plug-ins > Controlling the VSS4HD plug-in parameters u Reverb Level button Adjusts the level of the reverb tail. v Mute Reverb button Mutes the reverb. w Early Level button Adjusts the level of the early reflections. x Mute Early button Mutes the early reflections.
Plug-ins > Controlling the VSS4HD plug-in parameters Color page Color page 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ^ 8 a 9 ) ! @ # $ % Lo Cut button Adjusts the low-cut frequency. b Lo Damp button Adjusts the low-cut amount in dB units. c Hi Soften button Adjusts the high-frequency range of the reverb tail. d Lo Decay button Adjusts the multiple of decay for the frequency range below Lo Xover. e Lo Mid Decay button Adjusts the multiple of decay for the low-mid frequency range.
Plug-ins > Controlling the VSS4HD plug-in parameters h Lo Xover button Adjusts the crossover frequency between the low and low-mid frequency ranges of the reverb tail. i Mid Xover button Adjusts the crossover frequency between the low-mid and middle frequency ranges of the reverb tail. j Hi Xover button Adjusts the crossover frequency between the middle and high frequency ranges of the reverb tail. k Reverb Type button Selects the type of reverb effect.
Plug-ins > Controlling the NonLin2 plug-in parameters Controlling the NonLin2 plug-in parameters NonLin2 is a processor that emulates an effect reverb made by TC Electronic that enables the user to adjust an envelope. It provides vocal ambience, drum sound, reverse reverb, and a Twist effect. (only for DSP-R10) @ 1 2 5 3 # 4 3 $ % ^ 7 9 a 8 ) ! & Pre Delay button Adjusts the delay of the envelope. b Attack button Adjusts the attack time of the envelope.
Plug-ins > Controlling the NonLin2 plug-in parameters g Type list Selects the type of Twist that affects the reverb. h Ratio button Adjusts the proportion of Twist for the reverb. i LoCut button Adjusts the frequency of the low cut filter at the input stage of the reverb. j HiCut button Adjusts the frequency of the high cut filter at the input stage of the reverb. k Width button Adjusts the stereo width of the output. l Input meter Indicates the input level.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Bricasti Design Y7 Stereo Reverb Processor plug-in parameters Controlling the Bricasti Design Y7 Stereo Reverb Processor plug-in parameters Y7 Stereo Reverb Processor is a new, live-use reverb plug-in developed jointly by Bricasti Design, the world’s premier manuafacturer of hardware digital reverbs, and Yamaha. The sound is deep, dense, smooth and exceptionally natural.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Bricasti Design Y7 Stereo Reverb Processor plug-in parameters e Rolloff knob Adjusts the LPF of the output part. f Rich button When this button is on, the density of the reverb is increased. g High Diffusion button When this button is on, the amount of reverb spread is increased. h VLF（Very Low Frequency） button When this button is on, the reverb component of the ultra-low frequencies is increased. i Bandpass button Turns on BPF in the output section.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Analog Delay plug-in parameters Controlling the Analog Delay plug-in parameters This delay effect is based on the Yamaha E1010 analog delay released in the 1970s, with a few refinements to bring it up to date for modern applications. It delivers the same deep, organic echo sound that was a characteristic of the BBD analog delay devices used in the original E1010. Modulation can be added for a thick chorus sound.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Analog Delay plug-in parameters g TREBLE knob Adjusts the high frequency range level at the input stage. h DELAY knob Adjusts the delay time. i FEEDBACK knob Adjusts the feedback amount of the delay signal. j FREQUENCY knob Adjusts the frequency of modulation. k DEPTH knob Adjusts the depth of modulation. l MIX knob Adjusts the mix balance between dry and delay sounds.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Max100 plug-in parameters Controlling the Max100 plug-in parameters Max100 reproduces a classic phaser that appeared in the second half of the 1970s and continues to be popular today. With just four modes and a speed knob, it produces a variety of distinctive phase sounds. 1 2 3 a MODE knob Switches the tonal character. There are four types that differ in modulation amplitude and feedback amount. b SPEED knob Adjusts the modulation speed.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Dual Phaser plug-in parameters Controlling the Dual Phaser plug-in parameters Dual Phaser reproduces a vintage phaser that was manufactured during the middle of the 1970s. Two phasers, two LFOs, and four selectable modes allow a wide range of sounds to be produced. 1 2 5 6 3 4 8 9 7 ) ! @ # a LFO 1 RATE knob Adjusts the LFO 1 speed. b LFO 1 SHAPE switch Selects the LFO 1 waveform. c LFO 2 RATE knob Adjusts the LFO 2 speed.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Dual Phaser plug-in parameters k SWEEP NORM/REV switch Selects the LFO phase of Phaser B. NORM is normal phase, and REV is reverse phase. l PHASER B ON/OFF switch Switches Phaser B on/off. m MODE knob Rearranges the two phasers. I: After mixing the stereo input, the sound processed by Phaser A is output from the L-channel and the sound processed by Phaser B is output from the R-channel.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Vintage Phaser plug-in parameters Controlling the Vintage Phaser plug-in parameters Vintage Phaser provides the high degree of sound-shaping flexibility that is expected of a phaser, but is not intended as a reproduction of any specific model. With 4/6/8/10/12/16 stages and two different modes, it can become several different types of phaser. It provides speed, center frequency, depth, feedback, and color settings for detailed control of the sound.
Plug-ins > Controlling the H3000 Live plug-in parameters Controlling the H3000 Live plug-in parameters The Eventide H3000 Ultra-Harmonizer features outstanding effect quality that has made it an enduring favorite of engineers and musicians everywhere. Now the newly-developed H3000 Live offers that same performance optimized for live-sound applications.
Plug-ins > Controlling the H3000 Live plug-in parameters f PARAMETERS buttons Enable you to select parameters so you can modify assigned values. Parameter Description MIX Adjusts the mix balance between dry and wet signals. MODULATION Adjusts the amount of modulation. SHIFT (LEFT, RIGHT) Adjusts the pitch shift amount for each channel. DELAY (LEFT, RIGHT) Adjusts the delay time for each channel. FEEDBACK (LEFT, RIGHT) Adjusts the feedback amount for each channel.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Rupert EQ 773 plug-in parameters Controlling the Rupert EQ 773 plug-in parameters Rupert EQ 773 is a processor that emulates the equalizer section built into numerous classic consoles developed by Rupert Neve during the 1960s and 1970s. It accurately models this peerless EQ that is loved by engineers around the world and has been used on numerous historic sessions.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Rupert EQ 810 plug-in parameters Controlling the Rupert EQ 810 plug-in parameters Rupert EQ 810 is a processor that emulates the equalizer section built into the top recording consoles developed by Rupert Neve during the 1980s. A notable aspect of this EQ is that whether it is used to boost or to cut, the tonal changes it produces are effective and easy to understand.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Rupert EQ 810 plug-in parameters i HF IN button Switches the HF band (high shelving) on/off. j HF FREQ knob Adjusts the cutoff frequency of the HF band (high shelving). k HF GAIN knob Adjusts the gain of the HF band (high shelving). l HMF IN button Switches the HMF band (peaking) on/off. m HMF x3 button Triples the center frequency value of the HMF band (peaking). n HMF FREQ knob Adjusts the center frequency of the HMF band (peaking).
Plug-ins > Controlling the Portico 5033 plug-in parameters Controlling the Portico 5033 plug-in parameters 8 3 1 5 6 5 6 2 5 6 7 4 a ALL BYPASS button Switches EQ bypass on/off. Even in the bypassed state, the signal passes through the input/output transformer and amp circuit. b TRIM knob Adjusts the input gain of the effect. c LF/LMF/MF/HMF/HF frequency knobs Adjust the frequency of each band. d LMF/MF/HMF Q knobs Adjust the Q (steepness) of each band.
Plug-ins > Controlling the EQ-1A plug-in parameters Controlling the EQ-1A plug-in parameters EQ-1A is a processor that emulates a vintage EQ that is considered the classic passive EQ. It uses a distinctive style of operation, with controllable boost and attenuation (cut) for each of two regions, low and high. The frequency response is completely different from that of a typical EQ, giving this model its unique character.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Equalizer601 plug-in parameters Controlling the Equalizer601 plug-in parameters Equalizer601 emulates the characteristics of an analog equalizer of the 1970s. It can create a sense of drive by reproducing the distortion that is distinctive of an analog circuit. 1 2 8 3 9 4 ) 6 5 ! 7 a Frequency response curve graph Shows the frequency response curve of all bands combined, and the frequency response curve of each band.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Equalizer601 plug-in parameters g FLAT button Resets the gain of all bands to 0 dB. h Q/TYPE knobs Control the shape of the frequency response curve for the filter of each band. For MID 1–4 you can set the steepness (Q) of the frequency response curve. For the LO band and HI band, you can individually specify one of four filter types. i F (frequency) knobs Specify the center frequency of each filter. j G (gain) knobs Specify the gain of each filter.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Dynamic EQ plug-in parameters Controlling the Dynamic EQ plug-in parameters Dynamic EQ is a newly developed equalizer; it does not emulate any specific model. It provides a filter through which the same frequency band as the EQ is extracted to a sidechain, allowing the EQ gain to be varied dynamically when a specific band of the input signal becomes louder or softer, so that EQ is applied just as you might apply a compressor or expander to a specific frequency band.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Dynamic EQ plug-in parameters FILTER TYPE (Low Shelf) (Bell) (Hi Shelf) Main EQ Low Shelf Bell Hi Shelf Sidechain filter LPF BPF HPF e FREQUENCY knob Specifies the frequency that is controlled by the equalizer and the sidechain filter. f Q knob Specifies the Q (steepness) of the equalizer and the sidechain filter. Turning the knob toward the right will broaden the region affected by the equalizer and sidechain filter.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Dynamic EQ plug-in parameters Dynamic EQ graph Reference EQ graph Sidechain filter graph 684
Plug-ins > Controlling the Dynamic EQ4 plug-in parameters Controlling the Dynamic EQ4 plug-in parameters Dynamic EQ4 is a two-band dynamic equalizer that has been expanded to have four bands. The extra bands provide broader sound-shaping capability, and a KEY IN source selection function enables a variety of new applications.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Dynamic EQ4 plug-in parameters e EQ GAIN meter Indicates the gain of the dynamically changing EQ. f THRESHOLD meter Indicates the level of the sidechain signal, referenced to the threshold level. g KEY IN source buttons Select main (INT) or external (EXT) as the source for the KEY IN signal used for the corresponding band. h KEY IN CUE button If this button is on, the sidechain signal is sent to the CUE bus for monitoring.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Rupert Comp 754 plug-in parameters Controlling the Rupert Comp 754 plug-in parameters Rupert Comp 754 is a processor that emulates the compressor/limiter section built into numerous classic consoles developed by Rupert Neve during the 1960s and 1970s. It is a model that lies at the root of the bus compressors used as standard items in studios and broadcast stations, and is noted for its smooth and natural compression sound that does not impair the expressive power of the source.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Rupert Comp 754 plug-in parameters [How INPUT ADJUST works] Rupert Comp 754 Inversely change in tandem COMPRESSOR OUT COMPRESSOR/LIMITTER SECTION OUT INPUT GAIN OUTPUT GAIN LIMITTER INPUT CIRCUIT OUTPUT CIRCUIT IN IN INPUT ADJUST c BLEND knob Adjusts the dry/wet balance of the compressor/limiter. d METER SELECT switch Selects the signal source of the meter as input level, output level, or gain reduction.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Rupert Comp 754 plug-in parameters m LIMIT RECOVERY knob Selects the release time of the limiter. With the AUTO setting, the release time changes automatically in the range of 50 ms to 5 sec. n LIMIT ATTACK switch Switches the attack time of the limiter.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Rupert Comp 830 plug-in parameters Controlling the Rupert Comp 830 plug-in parameters Rupert Comp 830 is a processor that emulates the compressor section built into the top recording consoles developed by Rupert Neve during the 1980s. In addition to providing a broad range of control for Attack and Release, this compressor provides an EQ and filter on the sidechain, giving you an extremely broad range of tone-shaping possibilities, and letting you create nearly any sound.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Rupert Comp 830 plug-in parameters i COMP IN button Switches the compressor on/off. j THRESHOLD knob Adjusts the threshold of the compressor. k RATIO knob Adjusts the ratio of the compressor. l ATTACK knob Adjusts the attack time of the compressor. m RELEASE knob Adjusts the release time of the compressor. Adjusts the release time of the compressor. n AUTO RELEASE button Toggles the compressor’s auto release on/off. o GAIN knob Adjusts the gain of the compressor.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Portico 5043 plug-in parameters Controlling the Portico 5043 plug-in parameters Portico 5043 is a processor that emulates an analog compressor made by Rupert Neve Designs, as was the Portico 5033. The actual 5043 compressor featured the input/output transformer that was also provided on the 5033 EQ, and its natural, analog-like tonal character and method of action makes it widely usable for any source from drums to vocals.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Portico 5045 plug-in parameters Controlling the Portico 5045 plug-in parameters This is a processor that accurately models the Portico 5045 Primary Source Enhancer made by Rupert Neve Designs. Operation is extremely easy, allowing you to suppress background noise that enters the mic while increasing clarity, enhancing the primary source and also improving the feedback margin.
Plug-ins > Controlling the U76 plug-in parameters Controlling the U76 plug-in parameters U76 is a processor that emulates a standard vintage compressor used in a wide variety of situations. It does not provide the threshold parameter that is typically found on a compressor; instead, the compressor’s effect is adjusted by the balance between the input gain and output gain.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Opt-2A plug-in parameters Controlling the Opt-2A plug-in parameters Opt-2A is a processor that emulates a standard vintage model of vacuum tube optical compressor. The level is controlled using optical components such as a CdS-Cell and EL panel to produce smooth compression. The beautiful high-frequency overtones in the warm distortion created by the vacuum tube circuit generate an elegant and sophisticated sound. 4 1 a 2 3 GAIN knob Adjusts the output level.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Comp276 plug-in parameters Controlling the Comp276 plug-in parameters Comp276 emulates the characteristics of a sought-after analog compressor commonly used in recording studios. It produces a thick and solid sound that is suitable for drums or bass. 8 1 4 a 2 5 9 3 6 7 INPUT knob Adjusts the input level. b RATIO knob Adjusts the ratio of the compressor. c ATTACK knob Adjusts the attack time of the compressor. d OUTPUT knob Adjusts the output gain.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Buss Comp 369 plug-in parameters Controlling the Buss Comp 369 plug-in parameters Buss Comp 369 emulates a standard bus compressor that has been used in recording studios and broadcasting stations since the 1980s. It produces smooth, natural compression that does not interfere with source signal nuances, in contrast with the aggressive compression of the U76. Buss Comp 369 includes a compressor and a limiter that you can use individually or in combination.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Buss Comp 369 plug-in parameters Dual mount 3 1 9 a 4 5 ) ! 6 7 @ # INPUT ADJUST knob Adjusts the input gain. However, the output gain changes inversely in tandem with the level of this knob so that the volume remains the same as the pass-through volume (the volume obtained when COMP IN and LIMIT IN are off). For example if INPUT ADJUST is +5 dB, the input gain is +5 dB and the output gain is –5 dB.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Buss Comp 369 plug-in parameters [How INPUT ADJUST works] Buss Comp 369 Inversely change in tandem COMPRESSOR/LIMITTER SECTION COMPRESSOR INPUT CIRCUIT OUTPUT CIRCUIT IN INPUT ADJUST OUTPUT GAIN LIMITTER OUT OUT INPUT GAIN IN COMP THRESHOLD . LIMIT THRESHOLD dBFS . dBFS Practically, since the threshold changes, the indicated value will change in tandem. However, the internal status of the COMPRESSOR/LIMITER section will not change.
Plug-ins > Controlling the Buss Comp 369 plug-in parameters f COMP GAIN knob Adjusts the makeup gain of the compressor. This applies before the limiter stage. g COMP RATIO knob Specifies the compressor ratio. h METER SELECT switch (for Stereo mount) Selects the signal source of the meter. You can select from IN (input level) /GR (gain reduction) / OUT (output level). If you change this selection, the meter design also changes to VU, GR, or VU respectively.
Plug-ins > Controlling the MBC4 plug-in parameters Controlling the MBC4 plug-in parameters This high-quality four-band compressor utilizes VCM technology and features a GUI that offers outstanding operability and visibility. All advantages of the musical behavior of analog compressors have been built into the gain reduction circuitry of the MBC4, allowing smooth control of dynamics while retaining the overall image of the original sound.
Plug-ins > Controlling the MBC4 plug-in parameters f CROSSOVER RANGE This band-color horizontal bar graph indicates a variable range of the CROSSOVER parameter value for the corresponding band. g CROSSOVER BAND WIDTH This band-color horizontal bar graph changes according to the CROSSOVER parameter value for the corresponding band. h INPUT meter Shows the level of the input signal. One meter is shown in the case of DUAL, and two meters in the case of STEREO.
Plug-ins > Controlling the MBC4 plug-in parameters m ATTACK Adjusts the attack time at which the compressor begins to apply for the corresponding band. n RELEASE Adjusts the release time of the compressor for the corresponding band. o LINK knob If you select the parameter’s LINK knob, the display color will change as shown below. The corresponding parameters for four bands will link together, and the values will change collectively.
Plug-ins > Controlling the DaNSe plug-in parameters Controlling the DaNSe plug-in parameters DaNSe is a dynamic noise suppressor with exceptional sound quality and operability, developed by K’s Lab (Dr. K), of which Yamaha is a proud supporter. DaNSe features a revolutionary “learn” feature (LEARN), which analyzes noise frequency characteristics and applies automatic settings to provide the optimum noise suppression effect.
Plug-ins > Controlling the DaNSe plug-in parameters c LEARN button Starts the LEARN function. When the LEARN function starts working, the input signal will be analyzed for 10 seconds, and the THRESHOLD, GAIN 1–6 and internal signal processing parameters will automatically be adjusted to create the optimum noise suppression effect for the usage environment. After LEARN ends, adjust the THRESHOLD and TIGHTNESS a bit to your liking to achieve the sound quality that’s even closer to what you had in mind.
Plug-ins > Controlling the OpenDeck plug-in parameters Controlling the OpenDeck plug-in parameters OpenDeck emulates the tape compression created by two open reel tape recorders (a recording deck and a reproduction deck). You can change the sound quality by adjusting various elements, such as the deck type, tape quality, playback speed, etc. # 1 6 $ 3 8 2 7 4 5 9 % ) a ! @ RECORD: DECK TYPE Selects the recording deck type. b RECORD: LEVEL knob Adjusts the input level of the recording deck.
Plug-ins > Controlling the OpenDeck plug-in parameters g REPRODUCE: LEVEL knob Adjusts the output level of the reproduction deck. h REPRODUCE: ADJUST HIGH knob Adjusts the high range gain of the reproduction deck. i VU ADJUST switch When you turn this button on, the VU ADJUST knob, instead of the VU meter for Channel 2, appears in the meter section. If you turn this button off, the VU meter for Channel 2 appears. VU ADJUST knob Specifies the level assigned to 0VU on the VU meter.
Plug-ins > Using the Tap Tempo function Using the Tap Tempo function “Tap tempo” is a function that lets you specify the delay time of a delay effect or the modulation speed of a modulation effect by striking a key at the desired interval. To use the Tap function, you must first assign Tap Tempo to a USER DEFINED key, and then operate that USER DEFINED key. 1 Assign one of TAP TEMPO 1–4 to a USER DEFINED key.
Plug-ins > Using the Tap Tempo function 2 Open the popup window for an effect you want to control. 3 4 Set the SYNC parameter in the parameter field to ON. Select one of TEMPO 1–4 on the left of the popup menu. NOTE If you select MIDI CLK, the BPM parameter value will change according to the tempo of the MIDI timing clock received from the MIDI port.
Plug-ins > Using the Tap Tempo function 5 At the desired tempo, repeatedly press the USER DEFINED key to which you assigned the Tap Tempo function. The average interval (BPM) at which you press the key will be calculated, and that value will be applied to the BPM parameter. The average interval will be input to the parameter.
Plug-ins > Effects and tempo synchronization Effects and tempo synchronization Some effects can be synchronized with the tempo. There are two such types of effect: delay-typeeffects and modulation-type effects. For delay-type effects, the delay time will change according tothe tempo. For modulation-type effects, the frequency of the modulation signal will changeaccording to the tempo. Parameters related to tempo synchronization The following five parameters are related to tempo synchronization.
Plug-ins > Effects and tempo synchronization The TEMPO parameter has the following characteristics that are unlike other parameters. • The TEMPO parameter can be shared by multiple effects. • You cannot store it to or recall it from the Plug-in Library. (You can store it to and recall it from a scene.) This means that the TEMPO value may not necessarily be the same when an effect is recalled as when that effect was stored. Here is an example.
Recording > 2-track USB recorder Recording 2-track USB recorder The RIVAGE PM series features an easy-to-use 2-track USB recorder. The 2-track USB recorder enables you to record output signals from the STEREO bus or a MIX bus to a connected USB flash drive. You can also use it to play background music or sound effects that are stored on a USB flash drive by assigning them to an input channel.
Recording > Recording audio to a USB flash drive Recording audio to a USB flash drive You can record desired output channel signals, as an audio file (WAV or MP3), to the USB flash drive inserted in the RECORDING connector. 1 Press the RACK&REC button on the menu bar to access the RACK&REC screen. This screen includes several pages, which you can switch between using the tabs located at the top of the screen. 2 Press the USB RECORDER tab. The “RECORDER screen” (p.718) appears.
Recording > Recording audio to a USB flash drive 3 Connect a USB flash drive with sufficient free capacity to the RECORDING connector. The FREE SIZE field indicates the amount of free capacity. When you connect a USB flash drive to the RECORDING connector, a YPE folder and a SONGS folder within that YPE folder will be created automatically in the root directory of the USB flash drive.
Recording > Recording audio to a USB flash drive NOTE ( ( 6 The signal being recorded will not be output from the recorder’s output jacks (PLAYBACK OUT). Operating the GAIN knob will not affect the level of the signal being output to other ports from the corresponding output channel. Press the REC FORMAT/RATE field in the lower right of the screen, then select the file format and sampling rate for the audio file that will be recorded.
Recording > Recording audio to a USB flash drive 9 To stop recording, press the STOP button. The audio file will be saved to the USB flash drive. NOTE ( ( 10 In the default state, the recorded audio file will be saved in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder. You may also specify a folder of a level below the SONGS folder. The recorded file will be given a default title and file name. You can change these later. To audition the recorded content, proceed as follows.
Recording > RECORDER screen RECORDER screen 3 12 6 7 8 9 This screen contains the following items. ) 4 ! @ 5 ■ TRANSPORT field Enables you to control recording and playback of a song. a Current song Indicates the currently-selected song’s track number, title and artist name. The following indicators will appear during playback or recording.
Recording > RECORDER screen c Remaining time display Indicates the remaining playback time of the current song during playback. d Current song format Indicates the file format and bit rate of the current song (the file being played back). e REC FORMAT/RATE popup button Enables you to select the recording file format and recording rate. f REW button Moves the playback point to the beginning of the current song.
Recording > RECORDER screen m REPEAT button If this button is on, playback will repeat. If the SINGLE button is on, only the current song will play repeatedly. If the SINGLE button is off, all songs in the list that are marked with a PLAY check symbol will repeatedly play in the order of the list. If this is off, the song will play only once. If the SINGLE button is on, the current song will play only once, and then stop.
Recording > Playing back audio files from a USB flash drive Playing back audio files from a USB flash drive You can play back audio files that have been saved on a USB flash drive. In addition to files that were recorded on the RIVAGE PM series, you can also play files that were copied from your computer to the USB flash drive. The RIVAGE PM series supports WAV (uncompressed PCM) and MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3) file formats for playback.
Recording > Playing back audio files from a USB flash drive 7 Press a PLAY MODE button to select the playback mode. You can choose from the following four playback modes. 8 If you have selected a consecutive playback mode in step 6, press the PLAY check symbol column for each song you want to play. When performing consecutive playback, files marked with a check symbol will be played. 9 10 Press the PLAY/PAUSE button. The song you selected in step 5 will begin playing.
Recording > RECORDER screen RECORDER screen 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 1 9 ) ! This screen contains the following items. a Title list Indicates the playable audio files and the folders that are saved in the selected folder of the USB flash drive. The row with the blue background in the center of the list indicates the song file/folder that is selected for operations. b Status indicator A symbol indicating whether the file is playing or paused is shown at the left edge of the title list.
Recording > RECORDER screen h MOVE UP/MOVE DOWN buttons Change the order of the selected song in the list. i Display switch buttons Toggles between the SONG TITLE display and the FILE NAME display in the list. j SAVE LIST button Saves the order of the current title list and PLAY check symbol settings as a playlist. k RELOAD button Loads the playlist that was saved most recently. Use this button to revert the current playlist you are editing back to the previous state.
Recording > Playback mode pattern Playback mode pattern SINGLE button REPEAT button Mode On On The currently-selected song will play repeatedly until you stop playback. On Off The currently-selected song will play once and then stop. Off On Starting with the currently-selected song on the title list, songs will play back consecutively until the last song. Then, playback will return to the first song and will continue until you stop playback.
Recording > Editing the title list Editing the title list Here is how you can change the order of the audio files shown in the title list, and edit the titles or artist names. 1 2 Connect a USB flash drive containing audio files to the RECORDING connector. Press the RACK&REC button on the menu bar. The “RECORDER screen” (p.728) appears. 3 In the screen, you can use the folder icon in the NO. column and the change directory button to view the contents of the folder that includes the desired file.
Recording > Editing the title list 7 If necessary, use the SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button, ARTIST SORT button, and MOVE UP/MOVE DOWN buttons on screen to change the order of the title list. Use the following buttons to change the order of the title list. • SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button Press this button to sort the title list in numerical -> alphabetical order by title/file name. Pressing the button repeatedly will alternate between ascending and descending order.
Recording > RECORDER screen RECORDER screen 3 4 1 2 6 5 This screen contains the following items. a SONG TITLE/FILE NAME EDIT button Enables you to edit the title or file name of the song selected in the list. b ARTIST EDIT button Enables you to edit the artist name of the song selected in the list. c SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button Sorts the list in numerical/alphabetical order by title or file name. d ARTIST SORT button Sorts the list in numerical/alphabetical order by artist name.
Recording > Multitrack recording and virtual sound check Multitrack recording and virtual sound check The RIVAGE PM series supports multitrack recording via a Dante network or MADI. To perform multitrack recording, you must install an HY144-D card (maximum 144-in/144-out) in HY card slot 4 of the DSP engine (in the case of the CSD-R7, in HY card slot 3), and then record using DAW software on your Dante networkconnected computer.
Recording > Multitrack recording and virtual sound check ■ Recording ■ Playback I/O rack I/O rack TWINLANe Network (400 ch) TWINLANe Network (400 ch) DSP engine DSP engine STAGE INPUT STAGE INPUT INPUT CH INPUT CH PLAYBACK PLAYBACK Slot 4 Slot 4 HY144-D HY144-D Dante network Dante network Recording Playback Computer with an AIC128-D card installed Computer with an AIC128-D card installed DAW software (Nuendo Live, etc.) DAW software (Nuendo Live, etc.
Recording > Multitrack recording and virtual sound check ■ Sharing DAW playback with FoH and monitor I/O rack TWINLANe Network (400 ch) I/O rack FoH side DSP engine Monitor side STAGE INPUT DSP engine STAGE INPUT INPUT CH INPUT CH PLAYBACK PLAYBACK Slot 4 Slot 4 HY144-D HY144-D Dante network Computer with an AIC128-D card installed DAW software (Nuendo Live, etc.
Recording > Signal flow during a virtual sound check (VSC) Signal flow during a virtual sound check (VSC) DSP engine VSC* ON Recording Patch HY3 HY4 DAW } Ch 1 ..... } Ch 2 Input Patch VSC* A DIGITAL GAIN B A HPF ..... Input Ch 1 DIGITAL GAIN B HPF ..... Input Ch 2 * Virtual Sound Check * Each channel can individually be set to ON/OFF when switching to virtual sound check. This allows a virtual sound check that mixes playback from the recorder with actual stage inputs.
Recording > Signal flow for the USB memory recorder Signal flow for the USB memory recorder MIX1-72 MATRIX1-36 RECORDER INPUT L L R R STEREO A/B CH DIRECT OUT SRC L L INPUT1-144 R R PLAYBACK OUT NOTE Recording and playback cannot be done simultaneously.
Recording > Assigning channels to the input/output of the recorder Assigning channels to the input/output of the recorder Follow the steps below to patch the desired channels to the input and output of the USB memory recorder. You can patch any output channel or the direct output of an input channel to the recorder’s input. You can patch the recorder’s output to any input channel. 1 Press the RACK&REC button on the menu bar to access the RACK&REC screen.
Recording > RECORDER screen RECORDER screen 1 5 4 8 2 6 3 7 This window contains the following items. a RECORDER INPUT popup buttons (L/R) Press these buttons to access the INPUT PATCH popup window, in which you can select a signal to patch to the L/R channel of the recorder input. b RECORDER INPUT GAIN knob Sets the level of the signal input to the recorder. c RECORDER INPUT CUE buttons NOTE If CUE A, or CUE B is on, you will be able to audition the signal input to the recorder.
Recording > RECORDER screen g PLAYBACK OUTPUT CUE button NOTE If CUE A, or CUE B is on, you will be able to audition the playback signal output from the recorder. You cannot turn on any of these buttons and the RECORDER INPUT CUE button simultaneously. h PLAYBACK OUT meter Indicates the level of the recorder playback output signal.
Recording > INPUT PATCH popup window INPUT PATCH popup window 1 This screen contains the following items. a 2 Category list Enables you to select the channel category. b Channel select buttons Enable you to select the channel (that you want to patch to the USB memory recorder’s input) from the channels selected in the category list.
Recording > OUTPUT PATCH popup window OUTPUT PATCH popup window 1 2 This screen contains the following items. a Category list Enables you to select the channel category. b Channel select buttons Enable you to select the channel (that you want to patch to the USB memory recorder’s output) from the channels selected in the category list.
Recording > Virtual sound check Virtual sound check Materials that were recorded by multitrack recording can be used for virtual sound check. For example, you can record a rehearsal session the day before the concert, and use that recording for sound check on the day of the concert. This “virtual sound check” will reduce the burden on both musicians and sound engineers, and will help them get ready efficiently.
Recording > About Dante About Dante Dante is a network protocol developed by Audinate. It is designed to deliver multi-channel audio signals at various sampling and bit rates, as well as device control signals over a Giga-bit Ethernet (GbE) network. Visit the Audinate website for more details on Dante. http://www.audinate.com/ More information on Dante is also posted on the Yamaha Pro Audio website: http://www.yamahaproaudio.
Recording > Patching for multitrack recording and virtual sound check Patching for multitrack recording and virtual sound check HY card slot 4 on the DSP engine (or HY card slot 3 on the CSD-R7) features the Recording Patch function used for multitrack recording and virtual sound check (VSC). Patch channels (into which you want to record) to the ports of HY card slot 4 (or HY card slot 3 on the CSD-R7). 1 2 3 Press the PATCH button on the menu bar to access the PATCH screen. Press the RECORDING tab.
Recording > RECORDING PATCH screen RECORDING PATCH screen 8 @ 4 6 ) 6 7 1 2 5 This screen contains the following items. a 3 9 3 ! Category select list (channel) You can select the channel category using the knob. The categories correspond to the following channels. • CH1-144 • MIX1-72 • MTRX 1-36 • STEREO AL-BR b Channel display This area indicates channels that can be assigned to the RECORDING slot.
Recording > RECORDING PATCH screen f Continuous Patch button Press the continuous patch button, and then rotate the REC OUT select knob to patch the intersecting channels continuously. If you press the continuous patch button, the button and the the button again to confirm the selected continuous patches. Press the patches to their previous state. g button will appear. Press button to revert the continuous PLAYBACK IN ASSIGN This area indicates the number of PLAYBACK INs assigned to each channel.
Recording > Recording or playing back using a DAW on the computer Recording or playing back using a DAW on the computer Follow the steps below to record or play back using a DAW. • Setting up the RIVAGE PM series To perform a virtual sound check, configure the recording patches. Recording/playback signals should be transfered from and received at HY card slot 4 on the DSP engine (or HY card slot 3 on the CSD-R7). If the RPio622 or RPio222 signal is split out, you do not need to configure the patches.
Recording > Configuring Dante Accelerator Configuring Dante Accelerator First, make sure that the Dante Accelerator card is installed in the PCIe slot of your computer. Then, install the Dante Accelerator driver. For information about installing the driver and about the control panel, refer to the Installation Guide supplied with the driver. To achieve a stable live recording, we recommend you use the maximum buffer size and latency.
Recording > Configuring a Dante Virtual Soundcard Configuring a Dante Virtual Soundcard Install a Dante Virtual Soundcard (DVS) and Dante Controller on the computer that you will use for audio recording. And then, make the following settings before you turn on the DVS. ( Connect the GbE-compatible network port of the computer to a GbE-compatible network switch. ( Configure the computer to obtain an IP address automatically (this is the default setting). ( Specify the Dante latency.
Recording > Configuring Dante Controller Configuring Dante Controller Connect the network port of the computer to a GbE-compatible network switch. Configure the computer to obtain an IP address automatically (this is the default setting). You must make the following settings for Dante Controller. ( ( For multitrack recording: Patch audio signals from the I/O rack to the DVS or Dante Accelerator card for multitrack recording.
Recording > Setting up DAW software Setting up DAW software You must make the appropriate driver settings in your DAW software. In the device setting window, select “Dante Virtual Soundcard Card — ASIO” (or “Dante” for Mac) or “Yamaha AIC128-D” as the sound card (or audio driver) used for input/output. Some DAW software may require internal patching for the driver and the DAW software. For more information, refer to the DAW software manual.
Recording > Audio recording and playback Audio recording and playback After you have made the driver settings in your DAW software, you can record and play back audio. For multitrack recording, set the input ports for tracks in DAW software to the ports that receive audio signals from the I/O rack. For a virtual sound check, you must route recorded audio signals to the input channels on the RIVAGE PM series.
Scene memory > About the conceptual memory diagram Scene memory About the conceptual memory diagram The diagram below shows the relationship between current data, scene memory, and libraries.
Scene memory > About the conceptual memory diagram Library function Separately from scenes, various library functions allow data such as EQ settings and channel names to be saved and recalled.
Scene memory > About scene memories About scene memories On the RIVAGE PM series, scene numbers consist of an integer portion and a decimal portion, and can be assigned as desired. One way of organizing scenes would be to create integer-numbered scenes (main scenes) for each song, and then use the decimal portion to manage detailed changes within the song. Up to 1,000 scenes can be stored. 1.00 2.00 Tune1 Tune2 1.00 1.25 1.50 Tune1 Tune1 GuitarSolo Tune1 2nd Cho 2.
Scene memory > About scene memories Control via GPI/MIDI You can use the GPI connector or MIDI connectors to execute scene recall from an external device, or to transmit signals to an external device in conjunction with scene recall. Playback Link You can specify an audio file that will play back from a USB flash drive when a specific scene is recalled. This can be convenient if you want a sound effect or background music to be played automatically for a specific scene.
Scene memory > About scene memories Each scene contains the position of the top panel faders and [ON] key status, as well as the following parameters.
Scene memory > Using the keys in the SCENE MEMORY section Using the keys in the SCENE MEMORY section 1 3 2 4 5 7 6 This screen contains the following items. a [UNDO] key Cancels the most recent operation of storing, recalling or updating. After you cancel the operation by pressing the [UNDO] key, you can “redo” the canceled operation by pressing the [UNDO] key again. NOTE You cannot undo an operation to store a new scene. Delete the scene.
Scene memory > Using the keys in the SCENE MEMORY section e [STORE] key Stores the current mix data as a new scene to the selected scene memory. f [INC]/[DEC] keys Enable you to select the scene number of a scene that you want to store or recall. g [RECALL] key Enables you to recall a stored scene from scene memory.
Scene memory > Storing scenes (Using the keys in the SCENE MEMORY section) Storing scenes (Using the keys in the SCENE MEMORY section) The current mix data on the RIVAGE PM series can be saved as new scene data, or overwritten onto existing scene data to update it. 1 Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key. The “SCENE STORE screen” (p.759) will appear, enabling you to assign a title or comment to the scene.
Scene memory > Storing scenes (Using the keys in the SCENE MEMORY section) 5 To execute the store operation, press the OK button. The current mix data will be stored to the scene number you selected in step 2. If you decide to cancel the store operation, press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button. NOTE You can make settings such that the store confirmation dialog box will not appear.
Scene memory > SCENE STORE screen SCENE STORE screen 1 2 3 4 This screen contains the following items. a Scene number Rotate the knob beneath the number to enter a scene number. If you enter a number that already exists for another scene, that scene will be overwritten. b SCENE TITLE field Press this field to select it, and enter a title for the scene (maximum 16 characters). c COMMENT field Press this field to select it, and enter a comment for the scene.
Scene memory > SCENE STORE screen CAUTION ( While Overlay is enabled, if you recall a scene that was previously stored with added offset values, both the current offset values and the original offset values will be applied to the scene (thus doubling the offset value). An extremely high volume sound may be output as a result.
Scene memory > Automatic suggestion of scene numbers and names Automatic suggestion of scene numbers and names If you press the [STORE] key, the next unused integer higher than the current scene number will be suggested. If you press the [SHIFT] key + [STORE] key, a number equivalent to the current sub scene number incremented by a decimal will be suggested.
Scene memory > Updating scenes (Using the keys in the SCENE MEMORY section) Updating scenes (Using the keys in the SCENE MEMORY section) You can update scene data by overwriting the last-recalled scene with the current mix data. 1 Press the SCENE MEMORY [UPDATE] key. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the update operation. 2 To execute the update operation, press the OK button. The current mix data will overwrite the last-recalled scene.
Scene memory > Recalling scenes (Using the keys in the SCENE MEMORY section) Recalling scenes (Using the keys in the SCENE MEMORY section) You can recall scene data into current memory. Scene data is recalled through three filters: Focus, Recall Safe, and Channel Isolate. 1 Use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the scene number that you want to recall. The scene number of the currently-selected scene appears in the “SCENE field” (p.765) of the menu bar.
Scene memory > Recalling scenes (Using the keys in the SCENE MEMORY section) CAUTION ( While Overlay is enabled, if you recall a scene that was stored or globally-pasted with added offset values, both the current offset values and the original offset values will be applied to the scene, thus, doubling the offset value. In this case, extremely high volume sound may be output. Confirm the status of a scene to recall, and the on/off status of Overlay, before recalling the scene.
Scene memory > SCENE field SCENE field 1 2 45 1 3 5 This screen contains the following items. The SCENE field always displays general information about the scene. To switch between scene comment and scene title displays, hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the SCENE field. You can also press this field to access the SCENE LIST screen, in which you can view and edit more detailed settings for the scene. a Scene number Indicates the number of the currently-selected scene.
Scene memory > Storing scenes (Using the SCENE LIST screen) Storing scenes (Using the SCENE LIST screen) 1 Press the SCENE field on the menu bar. SCENE field This screen includes several pages, which you can switch between using the tabs located at the top of the screen. 2 Press the SCENE LIST tab. The view switches to the “SCENE LIST screen” (p.768). 3 Press the SCENE STORE button. The SCENE STORE window will appear, enabling you to assign a title or comment to the scene.
Scene memory > Storing scenes (Using the SCENE LIST screen) 8 If you want to cancel the overwrite-store operation that you just performed, press the UPDATE UNDO button. Immediately after overwrite-storing a scene, you can use the UPDATE UNDO button to undo (cancel) the scene store operation that was executed most recently. When you press the UPDATE UNDO button, a dialog box will ask you to confirm the undo operation. Press the OK button if you want to execute the undo operation.
Scene memory > SCENE LIST screen SCENE LIST screen % 1 2 6 3 5 4 78 9 ) ! # @ $ This screen contains the following items. a Scene list This area shows information about the scenes stored in memory. b Sort buttons The list will be sorted as follows, according to the column header you pressed. ( NO. Sorts the list in order of scene number. ( TITLE Sorts the list in numerical/alphabetical order by title. ( COMMENT Sorts the list in numerical/alphabetical order of comments.
Scene memory > SCENE LIST screen d Scene title popup button Indicates the title assigned to the scene. Press this button to access the SCENE STORE popup window, in which you can edit the title. e Protect (lock) symbol Indicates the write protect on/off status. Press this button to write-protect the scene, and the button will light. Press it again to cancel write protection. f Selected scene The currently-selected scene is highlighted in white in the list.
Scene memory > Recalling scenes (Using the SCENE LIST screen) Recalling scenes (Using the SCENE LIST screen) 1 2 Press the SCENE field on the menu bar. 3 Press the RECALL button. Rotate the screen encoder to select the scene number of the scene you want to recall. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the recall operation. 4 To execute the recall operation, press the OK button. The scene you selected in step 3 will be recalled.
Scene memory > Using USER DEFINED keys to recall a scene (Direct Recall function) Using USER DEFINED keys to recall a scene (Direct Recall function) You can use the USER DEFINED keys to recall a selected scene with a single keystroke, or to step through the scenes. To do this, you must first assign a scene recall operation to a USER DEFINED key. The following recall operations can be assigned to a USER DEFINED key.
Scene memory > Using USER DEFINED keys to recall a scene (Direct Recall function) 2 Press the USER DEFINED KEYS button to access the USER DEFINED KEYS popup window. The USER DEFINED KEYS page enables you to assign functions to USER DEFINED keys [1]–[12]. 3 Press the popup button for the USER DEFINED key (to which you want to assign a function) to open the popup window.
Scene memory > Using USER DEFINED keys to recall a scene (Direct Recall function) 4 In the FUNCTION column, select “SCENE.” Proceed as follows, depending on the function you want to assign. • To assign INC RECALL or DEC RECALL Choose “INC RECALL” or “DEC RECALL” in the PARAMETER 1 column. • To assign• DIRECT RECALL Choose “DIRECT RECALL” in the PARAMETER 1 column, and choose “SCENE #xxx” (xxx is the scene number) in the PARAMETER 2 column.
Scene memory > Sorting scene memories Sorting scene memories 1 Press the SCENE field on the menu bar. The SCENE LIST screen will appear, in which you can perform various scene-related operations. You can use the tabs located at the top of the SCENE LIST screen to select one of five different fields: COMMENT, FOCUS, FADE TIME, GPI OUT, or PLAYBACK LINK. 2 Press a desired tab at the top of the SCENE LIST screen. The view of the right side of the SCENE LIST screen will change accordingly.
Scene memory > SCENE LIST screen SCENE LIST screen % 1 2 6 3 5 4 78 9 ) ! # @ $ This screen contains the following items. a COMMENT sort button Sorts scenes in alphabetical order of the comments in the COMMENT field. Pressing the button repeatedly will alternate between ascending and descending order. b COMMENT field Press this field to open the SCENE STORE window, in which you can enter a comment for the scene.
Scene memory > SCENE LIST screen g LINK TO SURFACE button Turning this off will let you scroll the scene list without affecting the menu bar or scene number on the operating panel.
Scene memory > About editing scene memories About editing scene memories The scenes stored in scene memory can be erased or duplicated into different scene numbers. 1 Press the SCENE field on the menu bar. The“SCENE LIST screen” (p.778) appears, in which you can perform various scene-related operations. 2 Perform the desired editing operation. For more information about these operations, refer to the explanations below.
Scene memory > SCENE LIST screen SCENE LIST screen % 1 2 6 3 5 4 78 9 ) ! # @ $ This screen contains the following items. a COMMENT sort button Sorts scenes in alphabetical order of the comments in the COMMENT field. Pressing the button repeatedly will alternate between ascending and descending order. b COMMENT field Press this field to open the SCENE STORE window, in which you can enter a comment for the scene.
Scene memory > SCENE LIST screen g LINK TO SURFACE button Turning this off will let you scroll the scene list without affecting the menu bar or scene number on the operating panel.
Scene memory > Deleting a scene (DELETE) Deleting a scene (DELETE) This section explains how to delete a scene. 1 Press the SCENE field on the menu bar. The SCENE LIST screen will appear. 2 Rotate the CH1 screen encoder to select the scene you want to delete, and then press the DELETE button. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the delete operation. NOTE ( ( 3 You can select multiple scenes to delete.
Scene memory > Duplicating a scene (DUPLICATE) Duplicating a scene (DUPLICATE) You can duplicate a scene to create a new scene. 1 Press the SCENE field on the menu bar. The SCENE LIST screen will appear. 2 Rotate the CH1 screen encoder to select the scene you want to duplicate, and then press the DUPLICATE button. The SCENE DUPLICATE window will appear, enabling you to assign a title or comment to the scene. 3 Assign a title or comment to the scene as desired.
Scene memory > Modifying the scene number and title (RENAME) Modifying the scene number and title (RENAME) This section explains how to modify the scene number and title. 1 Press the SCENE field on the menu bar. The SCENE LIST screen will appear. 2 Rotate the CH1 screen encoder to select the scene for which you want to modify the number or title, and then press the scene title popup button. The SCENE EDIT window will appear, enabling you to assign a title or comment to the scene.
Scene memory > About the Focus function About the Focus function Focus is a function that lets you select which part of the data will be recalled when recalling scene data. Focus settings are saved in the data of each scene. Example:In a live concert where the engineer also changes for each band, it might be desirable to adjust the GEQ for each engineer.
Scene memory > Using the Focus function Using the Focus function “Focus” is a function that lets you specify the scene parameters that will be recalled (loaded) when you recall a scene. You can enable or disable this function for each scene individually. For example, it can be convenient to use this function if you want to recall only the input channel settings of a certain scene.
Scene memory > Using the Focus function NOTE You can use the Focus function in conjunction with the Recall Safe function. Channels or parameters that are excluded from recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be recalled.
Scene memory > FOCUS field FOCUS field 1 2 3 This screen contains the following items. a FOCUS button Enables or disables the Focus function for each scene. b SET popup button Press this button to access the SCENE SETUP (FOCUS) popup window, which enables you to select the parameters that you want to recall. c Focus parameter display section These indicators show the Focus settings that are specified for each scene (green: all parameters; blue: selected parameters).
Scene memory > SCENE SETUP (FOCUS) popup window SCENE SETUP (FOCUS) popup window 1 ) 3 ^ @ ! # 46 8 9 2 5 7 % $ This screen contains the following items. a Category select list (channel) Enables you to select a channel category. b Channel display Indicates the channel name. You can press the + or − button located next to the channel name to expand or collapse the channel indication for each category.
Scene memory > SCENE SETUP (FOCUS) popup window h ALL channel ON button Turn Focus on or off for all channels related to the selected parameter. i Parameter ON buttons Turn Focus on or off for parameters on each channel. j PLUG-IN/GEQ popup button Press one of these buttons to access the popup window, in which you can set the Focus function for each plug-in or GEQ.
Scene memory > SCENE SETUP (FOCUS) popup window k BUS/OTHERS popup button Press this button to access a popup window where you can specify how the Focus function affects basic MIX bus settings, channel link, and fader layer position. l LIBRARY button Press this button to open the FOCUS library window. m SET BY SEL button If this button is on, you will be able to add a channel by using the corresponding [SEL] key.
Scene memory > SCENE SETUP (FOCUS) popup window Channel off Recall Safe is activated, or channel is isolated 790
Scene memory > Using the Fade function Using the Fade function “Fade” is a function that smoothly changes the faders of specified channels/DCAs to their new values over a specified duration when you recall a scene. You can set the Fade function independently for each scene. 1 2 Press the SCENE field on the menu bar to access the SCENE LIST screen. Press the FADE TIME tab at the top of the SCENE LIST screen. The “FADE TIME field” (p.792) will appear in the right half of the SCENE LIST screen.
Scene memory > FADE TIME field FADE TIME field 1 2 3 This screen contains the following items. a FADER button Enables or disables the Fade function for each scene. b SET popup button Press this button to access the FADE TIME setup window, in which you can select a channel for which you want to use the Fade function, and specify the fade time (the duration of time over which the fader will reach its new value). c FADE TIME display This area indicates the fade time specified for each scene.
Scene memory > SCENE SETUP (FADE TIME) popup window SCENE SETUP (FADE TIME) popup window 1 5 3 4 2 In this popup window you can select the channels to which Fade will be applied, and adjust the fade time. a Channel display field In this field, the channels or DCAs to which Fade is applied (selected in the channel select field b) are highlighted. b Channel select field Enables you to select the channels/DCAs to which Fade is applied.
Scene memory > Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall (GPI OUT) Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall (GPI OUT) A control signal can be output to an external device connected to the GPI connector of the RIVAGE PM series when you recall a specific scene. Proceed as follows. NOTE For more information about GPI OUT settings, refer to “Using GPI OUT” (p.947).
Scene memory > Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall (GPI OUT) NOTE Scenes for which the GPI button is turned on are marked by a “GPI” indicator in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST window (COMMENT tab). 7 Recall the scene for which you want to output GPI OUT signals. When you recall the scene, the control signals will be output to an external device connected to the GPI OUT connector.
Scene memory > GPI field GPI field 1 2 3 This screen contains the following items. a GPI button If this button is on and the selected scene is recalled, a control signal will be output. b SET popup button Press this button to access a popup window, in which you can specify the control signal output from each GPI OUT. c GPI PARAMETER display section In this section, indicators show the status of the GPI settings specified for each scene.
Scene memory > Playing back an audio file in tandem with scene recall (PLAYBACK LINK) Playing back an audio file in tandem with scene recall (PLAYBACK LINK) You can specify an audio file that will be played back from a USB flash drive when a specific scene is recalled. This can be convenient if you want a sound effect or background music to be played automatically for a specific scene. Follow the steps below to link a scene recall with audio file playback.
Scene memory > Playing back an audio file in tandem with scene recall (PLAYBACK LINK) 8 Press the PLAY button to turn on the link to the audio file. You can turn the Playback function for audio files on or off individually for each scene. NOTE Scenes for which the PLAY button is turned on are marked by a “PLAY” indicator in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST window (COMMENT tab). 9 10 Repeat steps 4–8 to link audio files to other scenes. Recall a scene to which an audio file has been linked.
Scene memory > PLAYBACK LINK field PLAYBACK LINK field 1 2 3 This screen contains the following items. a PLAY button Enables or disables the Playback Link function for each scene. b Song select popup button Press this button to access the PLAYBACK LINK popup window, in which you can select a song and set the offset time (time duration from scene recall until the start of playback). The title of the selected song will appear on the button.
Scene memory > PLAYBACK LINK popup window PLAYBACK LINK popup window 1 3 6 This screen contains the following items. a 4 2 5 PATH indicator This area indicates the current directory path. b SONG TITLE/FILE NAME switch buttons Switch between the song title list and the file name list. c SONG TITLE/FILE NAME list Displays the song title and file name of the audio files in the \YPE\SONGS\ folder. You can select an audio file by pressing the name in the list.
Scene memory > Using the Global Paste function Using the Global Paste function “Global Paste” is a function that enables you to copy-and-paste the settings of a desired channel or parameter from the current mix data to scene data in memory (multiple selections are allowed). This is a convenient way in which changes to the current scene can be applied to multiple scenes that have already been stored. 1 Press the SCENE field on the menu bar. The SCENE LIST screen will appear.
Scene memory > Using the Global Paste function 9 If necessary, press the WITH OVERLAY APPLIED button. A dialog box will appear. CAUTION While Overlay is enabled, if you recall a scene that was stored or globally-pasted with added offset values, both the current offset values and the original offset values will be applied to the scene, thus, doubling the offset value. ( 10 Press the PASTE button. The selected item(s) in the current scene will be pasted to the specified scene(s) in memory.
Scene memory > GLOBAL PASTE screen GLOBAL PASTE screen # ) ! @ 3 $ 46 8 9 2 5 7 1 This screen contains the following items. a Category select list (channel) Enables you to select a channel category. b Channel display Indicates the channel name. You can press the + or − button located next to the channel name to expand or collapse the channel indication for each category. c Category select list Enables you to select the category of parameters to be displayed on screen.
Scene memory > GLOBAL PASTE screen h ALL channel ON buttons Turn Global Paste on or off for all channels related to the selected parameter. i Parameter ON buttons Turn Global Paste on or off for each parameter on each channel. j SCENE SELECT popup button Press this button to access the SCENE SELECT popup window, in which you can set the paste-destination scene(s). The button will indicate the number of selected scenes.
Scene memory > GLOBAL PASTE screen o LIBRARY button Press this button to open the FOCUS library window. These are the same as for the Focus Library. p ALL ON button/ALL OFF button Turns on/off all settings. q SET BY SEL button If this is on, you will be able to add the channel as a global paste target by using the [SEL] key. r Preset button Up to eight global paste target settings can be allocated to the buttons. Press the selected preset button once more to open the NAME EDIT popup window.
Scene memory > GLOBAL PASTE screen Channel off 806
Scene memory > SCENE SELECT popup window SCENE SELECT popup window 1 2 This screen contains the following items. a SCENE SELECT knob Use the corresponding screen encoder or the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select a scene. The index number of the currently-selected scene(s) appears beneath the knob. b SELECT MODE buttons Use these buttons to select how one or multiple scenes will be selected. SINGLE: Enables you to select a single scene. RANGE: Enables you to select consecutive scenes.
Scene memory > About the Recall Safe function About the Recall Safe function Recall Safe is a function that protects the parameters of the current mix from being affected by a scene memory that is recalled. Recall Safe settings are saved independently from the scene data. Example:In a show that consists of numerous existing scenes, if a special mic (for a presenter or safety announcement) is added after the scenes were created, settings with this mic unused would be recalled each time a scene was recalled.
Scene memory > Using the Recall Safe function Using the Recall Safe function “Recall Safe” is a function that excludes only specific parameters/channels (DCAs) from Recall operations. Unlike the “Using the Focus function” (p.784) which lets you make settings for individual scenes, the Recall Safe settings are globally applied to all scenes. 1 2 Press the SCENE field on the menu bar to access the SCENE LIST screen. Press the RECALL SAFE tab. The“RECALL SAFE screen” (p.810) appears.
Scene memory > RECALL SAFE screen RECALL SAFE screen ) 3 ! 46 1 8 9 2 5 7 This screen contains the following items. a Category select list (channel) Enables you to select a channel category. b Channel display Indicates the channel name. You can press the + or − button located next to the channel name to expand or collapse the channel indication for each category. c Category select list Enables you to select the category of parameters to be displayed on screen.
Scene memory > RECALL SAFE screen i Parameter ON buttons Turn Recall Safe on or off for parameters on each channel. j PLUG-IN/GEQ popup button Press this button to access the popup window, in which you can set up recall safe for each plug-in or GEQ. NOTICE ( k Even if Recall Safe is set to on, only individual parameters are the target. The mount status and insert patches are not subject to Recall Safe.
Scene memory > RECALL SAFE screen l SET BY SEL button If this button is on, you will be able to add a channel by using the corresponding [SEL] key. Button indications The button indications will change according to the parameter status.
Scene memory > Creating an event list Creating an event list The Event List function lets you arrange scenes and library items in the order in which you will use them, so that they can be recalled automatically according to the time code or interval that you specify, or recalled manually. NOTE The event list can be controlled only from the control surface whose CONSOLE ID=1. ■ Creating an event list 1 2 Press the SCENE field on the menu bar. Press the EVENT LIST tab.
Scene memory > EVENT LIST screen EVENT LIST screen 8 1 9 % 7 ) 2 3 ! 4 @ 5 6 $ # This screen contains the following items. a EVENTLIST button Enables or disables an event list. ( DISABLE button Disables the event list. ( ENABLE(MANUAL ONLY) button Enables manual-only recall of events registered in the event list. ( ENABLE button Enables the event list. If an event list is enabled, the SCENE field on the menu bar will display the number and title of the next event to be recalled.
Scene memory > EVENT LIST screen d Time code source Selects the source of the time code that will be used. e ( OFF..................................Time code is not received. ( INTERNAL ....................The time code internally generated by the control surface is used. ( TIMECODE IN..............The time code that is input from the TC IN connector of the DSP engine is used. ( MTC CONSOLE ..........The MIDI time code that is input from the MIDI connector of the control surface is used.
Scene memory > EVENT LIST screen k DELETE button Deletes the currently selected event. l UNDO button Cancels the immediately preceding edit of the event list. m DELETE ALL button Deletes all events in the list. n EVENT SELECT knob Use the corresponding screen encoder or the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select an event. o AUTO ALIGN button The events registered with the TIME CODE button are automatically sorted.
Scene memory > Automatic alignment of events Automatic alignment of events When the AUTO ALIGN button is turned on, the events registered with the TIME CODE button (TIME CODE events) are automatically sorted. When turned off, the TIME CODE event can be swapped freely. The TIME CODE events can be sorted by performance, greatly increasing the operational flexibility.
Scene memory > EVENT LIST EDIT popup window EVENT LIST EDIT popup window This window contains the following items.
Scene memory > Using MANUAL to recall scenes from an event list Using MANUAL to recall scenes from an event list In the case of MANUAL, you’ll use the EVENT RECALL buttons to recall events. In the case of INTERNAL or TIME CODE, select a time code source to recall events. 1 2 Press the SCENE field on the menu bar. Press the EVENT LIST tab. The view switches to the “EVENT LIST screen” (p.820). 3 4 ( Rotate the screen encoder to select the event that you want to recall. Press the EVENT RECALL button.
Scene memory > EVENT LIST screen EVENT LIST screen 1 2 This screen contains the following items. a Automatic follow button If you press this button, the selected event (shown as dark gray in the list) follows the event that is currently being executed (shown as light gray in the list). b EVENT RECALL buttons ( NEXT button Directly recalls the event that immediately follows the most-recently executed event.
Scene memory > About the Isolate function About the Isolate function This function protects an entire channel module from any type of memory recall; not only scene memory but also libraries such as EQ or Dynamics. The Isolate function protects parameters of the isolated channel from scene recall and library recall. NOTE ( ( If you load the setting file, the parameters of the isolated channel will not be protected by the Isolate function.
Scene memory > Using Preview mode Using Preview mode Preview mode allows you to check and edit the scene settings that are stored in memory without affecting the signal processing of the current scene. When you recall a scene in this mode, the settings of the newly recalled scene are shown on the panel of the RIVAGE PM series unit, but the signal processing of the current scene continues as it had been prior to recall.
Scene memory > Using Preview mode (Using the keys in the SCENE MEMORY section） Using Preview mode (Using the keys in the SCENE MEMORY section） 1 Press the [PREVIEW] key. When you enter Preview mode, the SCENE MEMORY display of the SCENE MEMORY section indicates [PREVIEW], and the [PREVIEW] key is lit. The SCENE field in the menu bar flashes red, and the PREVIEW button in the SCENE LIST screen is lit red. 2 Use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the scene number that you want to recall.
Scene memory > Using Preview mode (Using the SCENE LIST screen) Using Preview mode (Using the SCENE LIST screen) 1 2 3 4 Press the SCENE field on the menu bar. 5 6 7 Press the RECALL button in the SCENE LIST screen. 8 When you have finished checking or editing the settings of the scene, press the PREVIEW button in the SCENE LIST screen. Press the SCENE LIST tab to access the SCENE LIST screen. Press the PREVIEW button of the SCENE LIST screen to enter Preview mode.
Scene memory > About the functions in Preview mode About the functions in Preview mode The current scene will change in response to operations in the following software or external devices. ( RIVAGE PM Editor ( StageMix ( MIDI Rx ( GPI IN In the same way, communication is sent to the following software or external devices when you change the current scene. ( RIVAGE PM Editor ( StageMix ( MIDI Tx ( GPI OUT The meters indicate the state of signal processing for the current scene.
Scene memory > About the functions in Preview mode ( While executing CSV import/export ( While updating the firmware ( While initializing channel parameters Other restrictions ( Undo is not possible for a recall operation that was executed while in Preview mode (however, this does not apply to a recall that was performed from outside).
OVERLAY > About the Overlay function OVERLAY About the Overlay function Overlay is a function that enables you to add or “overlay” a temporary offset (+/-) value to fader levels or Mix/ Matrix send levels in a current mix. The “overlaid” value is something like a transparent filter applied to the level values. It enables you to temporarily adjust the relative levels without modifying existing scene data.
OVERLAY > Selected Channel section（ OVERLAY） Selected Channel section（ OVERLAY） 1 2 This screen contains the following items. a [OVERLAY] key Press this button to display the OVERLAY SETTING screen. While pressing and holding down the [SHIFT] key, press the [OVERLAY] key to switch Overlay on or off. While Overlay is turned on, press and hold down the [OVERLAY] key to enter Overlay edit mode. b [SHIFT] key Combine with another key to perform certain functions.
OVERLAY > Selected Channel section（ OVERLAY） 3 4 6 5 c [ON] key Switches the channel on or off. d [FADER] knob Adjusts the channel fader level. e MIX/MATRIX SENDS knobs Adjust the send levels for the corresponding buses.
OVERLAY > Selected Channel section（ OVERLAY） f MIX/MATRIX SENDS [ON] keys Switch the send signal to the corresponding bus on or off.
OVERLAY > Selected Channel section（ OVERLAY） g [ON] key Switches the channel on or off. h Fader This is a touch-sensitive 100 mm motorized fader.
OVERLAY > Controlling the Overlay function using the keys and knobs on the top panel Controlling the Overlay function using the keys and knobs on the top panel 1 While pressing and holding down the [SHIFT] key, press the [OVERLAY] key to switch Overlay on. The [OVERLAY] key LED will light. 2 Press and hold down the [OVERLAY] key to enter Overlay edit mode. The indicators for editable channels and buses will flash.
OVERLAY > Controlling the Overlay function from the touch screen Controlling the Overlay function from the touch screen 1 Press the [OVERLAY] key. The “OVERLAY SETTING screen” (p.834) will appear. 2 3 Press the Overlay ON button to enable Overlay. Select a channel or DCA and parameter to set the Overlay offset value. A selected field will be surrounded by a frame. 4 Rotate the Overlay parameter setting knob to adjust the offset value. The value will appear in the field.
OVERLAY > OVERLAY SETTING screen OVERLAY SETTING screen 1 2 7 8 9 3 4 5 6 This screen contains the following items. a Overlay ON button Turn this button on to enable the offset value. b CLEAR button Press this button to clear the selected parameter setting. c Overlay parameter setting knob While Overlay is turned on, you can set the value between -20.00dB and +10.00dB. d Category select list (channel) Enables you to select a channel category.
OVERLAY > OVERLAY SETTING screen f EXCLUDE button If the EXCLUDE button is turned on, the corresponding channel will be excluded from the Overlay target. g Category select list (parameter) Enables you to select the parameter category. The categories correspond to the following parameters.
OVERLAY > Example of panel and touch screen indication while Overlay is enabled Example of panel and touch screen indication while Overlay is enabled When Overlay is enabled, the panel and touch screen will update its indication (pink or light blue) using the Overlay setting. Panel SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen Fader strip field MIX/MATRIX SENDS field OVERVIEW screen SEND field Channel name area OVLY –5.1 Vocal CH 1 –27.
File > SAVE/LOAD File SAVE/LOAD You can store and load all data of the RIVAGE PM series to and from a USB flash drive connected to the USB port on the control surface. NOTE ( ( ( ( You cannot use the RECORDING connector (a USB port dedicated for recording) for save and load operations. The system will recognize only one USB flash drive that is connected to one of the USB ports. Do not connect multiple USB flash drives. The operation of USB 2.0 or 3.0 flash drives only is guaranteed.
File > Data handled by a settings file Data handled by a settings file Settings data of a system based on the RIVAGE PM series can be saved on a USB flash drive as a settings file. The settings file will have a file name extension of “.RIVAGEPM”. The settings file contains all data such as scenes, libraries, and system setup.
File > Data handled by a settings file TALKBACK Talkback settings RTA Realtime analyzer settings METERING POINT Meter display point settings PEAK HOLD Peak hold on/off settings SCENE ★ FOCUS Focus settings RECALL SAFE Recall safe settings ★ PLAY BACK LINK Playback link settings ★ FADE TIME Fade function settings OVERLAY OVERLAY Overlay settings ISOLATE ISOLATE Isolate settings SURROUND ★ SURROUND Settings for surround mode Library CHANNEL Channel library settings EQ EQ library s
File > Saving the RIVAGE PM series’s settings on a USB flash drive Saving the RIVAGE PM series’s settings on a USB flash drive All internal data of the RIVAGE PM series can be saved to the USB flash drive in a single operation as a settings file. The stored file will have a file name extension of “.RIVAGEPM”. 1 Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen.
File > Saving the RIVAGE PM series’s settings on a USB flash drive 2 Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the SAVE/LOAD popup window. 3 Press the SAVE button in the SAVE/LOAD popup window. The “SAVE SELECT screen” (p.842) will appear, in which you can select data to save. 4 In the SAVE SELECT screen, select a type of data to save. NOTE The SAVE button will become available if data to save exists. 5 Press the SAVE button in the SAVE SELECT screen.
File > SAVE SELECT screen SAVE SELECT screen 1 2 3 This window contains the following items. a TYPE field Enables you to select a type of data to save. The displayed items on this screen vary depending on the selected tab. ( ( ( ALL tab All items are targeted. (Type: ALL) SCENE LIST tab Scene memories are targeted. (Type: SCENE) INPUT/OUTPUT tab The following table lists the items you can select.
File > SAVE SELECT screen Button PLUG-IN Data Type Portico5033 library P5033 Portico5043 library P5043 Portico5045 library P5045 U76 library P U76 Opt-2A library P OP2 EQ-1A library P EQ1 Buss Comp 369 library P BCP MBC4 library P MBC4 REV-X library P REVX Reverb library P REV Stereo Reverb library P STRV EarlyReflections library P ER Gate Reverb library P GTRV Mono Delay library P MNDL Stereo Delay library P STDL Mod.
File > SAVE SELECT screen Button Data PLUG-IN Type Vintage Phaser library P VPHS RupertEQ773 library P Q773 RupertEQ810 library P Q810 RupertComp754 library P C754 RupertComp830 library P C830 Dynamic EQ4 library P DEQ4 Analog Delay library P ADLY H3000 Live library P H3KL DaNSe library P DNSE SP2016 library P 2016 Buttons Data Type GEQ LIB GEQ library GEQ Button Data Type OVERLAY LIB Overlay library OVERLAY ( ( OVERLAY tab This targets the overlay.
File > Loading a file from a USB flash drive Loading a file from a USB flash drive Follow the steps below to load the RIVAGE PM series setting file from the USB flash drive into the console. You can use the same procedure to load the following files other than the setting file. Extension Type Contents of file ALL All data including internal settings for the RIVAGE PM series (the save format prior to V3.
File > Loading a file from a USB flash drive 1 Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen. 2 Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the SAVE/LOAD popup window. Select a file to load. NOTE The LOAD button will become available if you select loadable data.
File > Loading a file from a USB flash drive 3 Press the LOAD button in the SAVE/LOAD popup window. The“LOAD SELECT screen” (p.848) will appear, in which you can select data to load. 4 In the “LOAD SELECT screen” (p.850), select a type of data, data to load, and load destination. NOTE If the SOURCE field and DESTINATION field are displayed, selecting data to load and the data destination in these fields will enable the LOAD button. 5 6 Press the LOAD button. A confirmation dialog box will appear.
File > LOAD SELECT screen LOAD SELECT screen 1 2 4 3 5 3 6 7 8 3 9 ) This screen contains the following items. a TYPE field Enables you to select a type of data to load. The displayed items in the TYPE field vary depending on the selected tab. (“Saving the RIVAGE PM series’s settings on a USB flash drive” (p.840)) b Data field Indicates data of the selected type. c Data select knob Use the corresponding screen encoder or the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select data.
File > LOAD SELECT screen h CLEAR ALL button Press this button to clear all selections. i LIST button Press this button so that you can select a load destination from the list. j DIRECT button Press this field so that you will be able to specify the destination by entering the number directly into the field.
File > LOAD SELECT screen LOAD SELECT screen 1 5 2 This screen contains the following items. a 3 4 Firmware version indication Shows the version of firmware on which the data was created. b TOTAL LIBRARY USAGE indication Shows the state of library usage. c Number of selected data items Shows the number of items selected in the SOURCE field.
File > LOAD SELECT screen LOAD SELECT screen 1 This window contains the following items. a WITH DANTE SETUP button If this is on when loading, the Dante settings included in the file will be applied. NOTE ( ( The Dante Control ID will not be applied even if the Dante settings are loaded. This prevents all Dante settings for the entire system to be made from DANTE SETUP on the control surface when ID#1 is changed to another ID#1 while loading a file. There are no options when saving.
File > LOAD SELECT screen 1 a DETAILS button Press this button to access the SYSTEM CONFLICT popup window, which shows the differences in configuration. NOTE When loading data with ALL type, press the WITH SYSTEM SETTINGS button to load the following items.
File > LOAD SELECT screen ( WITH RECALL settings for RY slot of RPio622/222 (parameter settings in the RY card will be loaded regardless of WITH RECALL settings) ( Network settings (HY slot or RIVAGE PM StageMix) ( +48V MASTER 853
File > About loading About loading If you select as the load destination a scene memory number for which an associated scene already exists, the existing scene will be deleted first, and then the data will be loaded into that scene memory. Data to load Load destination (1.00 is selected) Results The same principle applies to the libraries. If the destination already contains data, it will be overwritten by loaded data.
File > Editing the files saved on the USB flash drive Editing the files saved on the USB flash drive This section explains how to perform editing operations for the files and directories on the USB flash drive. 1 2 Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen. Press the SAVE/LOAD button. The “SAVE/LOAD popup window” (p.856) appears. The list will show the files and subdirectories that have been saved. 3 Perform the desired editing operation.
File > SAVE/LOAD popup window SAVE/LOAD popup window 6 5 8 This screen contains the following items. 7 MAKE DIR button Creates a new directory. a MAKE DIR button Creates a new directory. b COPY button Copies a file into a buffer memory (a temporary storage area). c PASTE button Pastes the file from the buffer memory. d DELETE button Deletes the currently-selected file. NOTE A directory cannot be deleted.
File > SAVE/LOAD popup window f PATH Indicates the name of the current directory. Press the arrow button to move to the next higher level. If the current directory is the top level, the arrow button is dimmed. g File List This area lists files that are saved on the USB flash drive. ( FILE NAME Indicates the file name, extension, and icon. If you press the file name, the TITLE EDIT popup window will appear, enabling you to edit the file name.
File > Sorting files and editing file names/comments Sorting files and editing file names/comments 1 To sort the files, press one of the sort buttons located to the right of each column heading (“FILE NAME,” “COMMENT,” “READ ONLY,” “TYPE,” or “TIME STAMP”) at the top of the file list. To sort the one of the sort buttons located to the right of each column heading (“FILE NAME,” “COMMENT,” “READ ONLY,” “TYPE,” or “TIME STAMP”) at the top of the file list.
File > Sort buttons located at the top of the file list Sort buttons located at the top of the file list 1 This screen contains the following items. a 2 3 4 5 FILE NAME Sorts the list in numerical/alphabetical order of the file names. b COMMENT Sorts the list in numerical/alphabetical order of comments. c READ ONLY Sorts the list by Write Protect on/off status. d TYPE Sort the list by file type. e TIME STAMP Sorts the list by date and time of update.
File > Copying and pasting a file Copying and pasting a file Follow the steps below to copy a file into buffer memory, and then paste it with a different file name. 1 Rotate the screen encoder to select the copy-source file, and press the COPY button. The highlighted line in the file list indicates that the file is selected. 2 If necessary, press the directory icon and change the directory. To move to the next higher level, press the arrow button in the PATH field. 3 Press the PASTE button.
File > Deleting a file Deleting a file 1 Rotate the screen encoder to select the file you want to delete, and press the DELETE button. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Delete operation. 2 To execute the Delete operation, press the OK button. NOTE You cannot delete a protected file.
File > Creating a directory Creating a directory 1 If necessary, press the directory icon and change the directory. To move to the next higher level, press the arrow button in the PATH field. 2 Press the MAKE DIR button. A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter a directory name. 3 Enter the name of the directory you want to create, then press the MAKE button. NOTE You cannot create a directory using a directory name that already exists.
File > Exporting a CSV file Exporting a CSV file The state of the channel names and patch connections of the RIVAGE PM series can be exported or imported as a CSV format file in order to edit the data or to exchange data between units. The applicable parameters and file names are as follows. For details, refer to the data list. Channel name / channel color / icon Patch connection status Parameter File name INPUT InName.csv MIX MixName.csv MATRIX MtxName.csv STEREO StName.
File > Exporting a CSV file 3 Press the EXPORT button if you want to export a CSV file, or press the IMPORT button if you want to import a CSV file. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the operation. 4 To execute, press the OK button.
File > CSV EXPORT/IMPORT popup window CSV EXPORT/IMPORT popup window 1 2 This screen contains the following items. a EXPORT button When you press this button, a CSV file is exported to the current directory. b EXPORT button When you press this button, a CSV file is imported from the current directory.
Theatre Mode > Theatre mode Theatre Mode Theatre mode The “Theatre mode” is a mode that is optimal for use in theaters, which allows for EQ and dynamics to be set over four banks and then allocated for each actor. In Theatre mode, the parameters for EQ and dynamics are not respectively stored in scene memory. Rather, only the information on what bank is used is stored.
Theatre Mode > How to configure the Theatre mode settings How to configure the Theatre mode settings This section explains the steps for configuring the Theatre mode settings. 1 Press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 1 Press the MAINTENANCE button to access the MAINTENANCE popup window.
Theatre Mode > How to configure the Theatre mode settings 2 Press the UNIT MODE tab. 3 Press the THEATRE mode switching button. After the mode switches, a confirm popup window will open to confirm that the control surface will be restarted. 4 Press the OK button.
Theatre Mode > How to configure the Theatre mode settings for DSP engines How to configure the Theatre mode settings for DSP engines This section explains the steps for configuring Theatre mode settings for a DSP engine. 1 2 3 4 Press the [MENU] key on the front panel of the DSP engine. Use the [▲]/[▼] keys to select “Unit Mode”. Press the [ENTER] key. Use the [▲]/[▼] keys to select “Theatre”. Unit Mode Theatre 5 6 Press the [ENTER] key. After “DONE” is displayed, the DSP engine will reboot.
Theatre Mode > SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen (Theatre mode) SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen (Theatre mode) When the Theatre mode setting is set in UNIT MODE and the BANK display button is pressed, the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen for the input channel will show as follows. 1 2 3 4 5 3 5 3 a BANK display button When this is turned on, a selection button will be displayed to switch between the EQ for banks A–D and the graph for Dynamics 1/2.
Theatre Mode > Added indicators in Theatre mode Added indicators in Theatre mode The actor library name has been added as an indicator for the NAME popup buttons. The actor library name has been added as an indicator to the actor library popup buttons on the NAME/ICON EDIT popup window, which appears when a NAME popup button is pressed. Pressing an actor library popup button will display the actor library popup window.
Theatre Mode > OVERVIEW screen OVERVIEW screen When the Theatre mode setting is set in UNIT MODE, the OVERVIEW screen will appear as follows. The actor library name has been added as an indicator for the channel name area. (Pressing the [SHIFT] key will display the CUE status, as with normal mode.) When the EQ or dynamics parameters have been changed, an asterisk will appear in the actor library name.
Theatre Mode > How to configure the actor library settings How to configure the actor library settings This section explains how to configure the actor library settings. 1 2 Press the PATCH button to access the PATCH screen. Press the ACTOR tab. The “Actor library screen” (p.874) will display. 3 Edit the actor library settings as needed. NOTE ( ( The actor libraries associated with a channel will not be copied when using the CH COPY function. Actor libraries can be moved with the CH MOVE function.
Theatre Mode > Actor library screen Actor library screen 5 1 2 3 6 7 4 8 9 This screen contains the following items. a INPUT NAME Indicates the input channels that will be assigned to the actor library. b ACTOR LIBRARY Shows the actor library name that was set. Press this to display the actor library popup window, where you can configure the actor library. c UPDATE button Updates the library to the current data. d RECALL button Recalls the library set in the respective channel.
Theatre Mode > Actor library screen i DEFAULT ALL button Cancels the library settings for all channels and initializes the current data for the EQ and Dynamics 4 bank.
User Setup > Preference settings User Setup Preference settings You can make various settings for the RIVAGE PM10’s operating environment, such as how popup windows appear, and whether [SEL] key on/off operations will be linked. 1 Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen. 2 Press the PREFERENCES button to access the PREFERENCES popup window. This window includes several pages, which you can switch between using the tabs located at the top of the window.
User Setup > SURFACE SETTINGS1 SURFACE SETTINGS1 1 2 3 4 This screen contains the following items. a 5 BANK Selects the bank to which the settings for SurfaceSetting1 parameters (except for CUE SETTINGS) on this screen will be saved. You can save the settings, and call up a bank to switch between settings if desired. Press the selected bank once more to access the window where you can assign a name. NOTE You can assign the function to switch banks to USER DEFINED keys.
User Setup > SURFACE SETTINGS1 d BAY LINK This sets the function for linking between multiple bays. White lines connect the linked bays. e ( BAY LINK: Selects layer settings for faders, or settings for linked bays.
User Setup > SURFACE SETTINGS2 SURFACE SETTINGS2 This screen contains the following items. a AUTO CHANNEL SELECT field Specifies whether the corresponding channel will be selected when you operate the [ON] key or fader for the channel. This can be turned on/off separately for input channels and output channels. b USE FADER TOUCH If this ON button is turned on, touching a fader will automatically select the corresponding channel via the Touch Sense function built into the channel fader.
User Setup > SURFACE SETTINGS2 f Fn KEYS ASSIGNMENT（CS-R10、CS-R10-S、CSD-R7） Enables you to select one of the following functions to be assigned to each [Fn] key. g ( NONE...........................................No function will be assigned. ( INPUT A/B...............................Switches between INPUT A and B. ( ISOLATE...............................Channel Isolate ON/OFF ( ALTERNATE CUE...............................If the CUE button is set to CUE A, B will be cued.
User Setup > SURFACE SETTINGS2 GAIN KNOB FUNCTION （CS-R5、CS-R3） The target of the GAIN knob in the Selected Channel section can be selected from ANALOG GAIN, DIGITAL GAIN, and AUTO A.G./D.G. For bays with AUTO A.G./D.G. set, analog gain is displayed for each channel if analog gain is present at the patched port, and digital gain is displayed if it is not present.
User Setup > SCREEN SETTINGS SCREEN SETTINGS 6 1 4 7 8 2 5 3 9 This screen contains the following items. ■ SCREEN OPTIONS a GAINS SHOWN ON OVERVIEW SCREEN Enables you to select either ANALOG GAIN, DIGITAL GAIN or AUTO A.G./D.G. for each bay displayed on the OVERVIEW screen. For bays on which AUTO A.G./D.G. has been set, the analog gain will be shown for each channel on the ports that have been patched where analog gain exists; and if analog gain does not exist, digital gain is shown.
User Setup > SCREEN SETTINGS e PATCH Enables you to turn on or off options related to patch operations. ( CHANGE If this ON button is lit, a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input patch or output patch. ( STEAL If this ON button is lit, a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input or output patch item that is already patched to a port. ■ ERROR MESSAGES field f DIGITAL I/O If this button is on and a digital audio I/O error occurs, an error message will be displayed.
User Setup > MISC MISC 1 This screen contains the following items. a USB MOUSE/KEYBOARD ( MOUSE SPEED Specifies the speed of cursor movement controlled via the USB mouse. The pull-down menu provides five speed options. The higher the value, the faster the speed. ( USB KEYBOARD TYPE Select the USB keyboard type. Options include English, Japanese, German, French, Italian, and Spanish.
User Setup > Channel Strip section: Using the CUSTOM [1]/[2] keys (CS-R10, CSD-R7) Channel Strip section: Using the CUSTOM [1]/[2] keys (CS-R10, CSD-R7) a CUSTOM [1]/[2] keys Enable you to select a custom layer. Normally, you can assign custom faders of two banks (total of 12 layers) to each custom layer. NOTE Press CUSTOM [1] and CUSTOM [2] together to enter Custom mode, where you can assign custom faders of five banks (total of 60 layers).
User Setup > Channel Strip section: Using the [CUSTOM] keys (CS-R5、CS-R3) Channel Strip section: Using the [CUSTOM] keys (CSR5、CS-R3) a [CUSTOM] key Turns Custom mode on or off. Use the INPUT [1]/[2] keys, the [MIX]/[MATRIX] keys, and the [DCA] key to select a Custom bank. The bank numbers (1–5) are labeled adjacent to these keys. Press and hold down to lock the Custom mode. To unlock the mode, press and hold down again. b Layer Select [A]/[B]/[C]/[D]/[E]/[F] keys Enable you to select a layer.
User Setup > Custom fader banks and master faders Custom fader banks and master faders A set of channels assigned to the top-panel faders is called a “fader bank.” There are input and output channel banks, as well as custom fader banks. Custom fader banks enable you to select various combinations of channels, regardless of channel types. You can also change the setting of the channels that will be controlled by the two master faders. 1 Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen.
User Setup > Custom fader banks and master faders 7 If necessary, select channels by pressing the channel select popup buttons. CH SELECT popup window 8 9 From the list, select desired channels. When you finish selecting the channels, press the CLOSE button.
User Setup > CUSTOM FADER BANK popup window CUSTOM FADER BANK popup window CUSTOM FADER BANK popup window (when a bay is selected) @ 1 3 2 5 4 6 7 8 9 ) ! This screen contains the following items. a Bay select buttons Enable you to select a bay or master faders to which you want to assign a combination of channels. b ( L....................................CUSTOM of bay L ( C....................................CUSTOM of bay C ( R....................................
User Setup > CUSTOM FADER BANK popup window f LAYER CLEAR button This button sets the selected layer settings as unassigned. Pressing this button will open a confirmation dialog box. Press OK to execute. Otherwise, press CANCEL to return to the previous screen without changing the setting. g LAYER COPY button Copies the selected layer. h LAYER PASTE button Pastes the selected layer. i MOVE button Press this to enter MOVE mode, where you can move fader blocks.
User Setup > USER DEFINED KNOBS section USER DEFINED KNOBS section 1 2 3 a USER DEFINED [A]/[B]/[C]/[D] BANK keys Select the bank ([A], [B], [C], or [D]) for the USER DEFINED knobs or USER DEFINED keys. b USER DEFINED KNOBS displays Indicate the functions assigned to the USER DEFINED knobs. c USER DEFINED KNOBS [1]/[2]/[3]/[4] Control the functions as assigned by the user.
User Setup > Assigning a function to a USER DEFINED knob Assigning a function to a USER DEFINED knob 1 Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen. 2 Press the USER DEFINED KNOBS button. The “USER DEFINED KNOBS popup window” (p.894) appears.
User Setup > Assigning a function to a USER DEFINED knob 3 Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED knob to which you want to assign a function. The system displays a popup window, in which you can assign a function to the USER DEFINED knob. 4 Make sure that the FUNCTION field is enclosed by a frame, and then use the screen encoder on the panel to select the function that you want to assign. For details on the assignable functions and their parameters, refer to the data list.
User Setup > USER DEFINED KNOBS popup window USER DEFINED KNOBS popup window 1 2 This screen contains the following items. a BANK A–D tabs Enable you to select the bank ([A], [B], [C], or [D]) for the USER DEFINED knobs. b USER DEFINED KNOBS 1–4 Link to USER DEFINED knobs [1]–[4] on the panel. Press one of these buttons to access the USER DEFINED KNOBS SETUP popup window, in which you can assign a function to the selected button.
User Setup > Functions that can be assigned to the USER DEFINED knobs Functions that can be assigned to the USER DEFINED knobs The functions that can be assigned to the USER DEFINED knobs are as follows.
User Setup > Functions that can be assigned to the USER DEFINED knobs Function PARAMETER1 PARAMETER2 HOLD CH1–288, MIX 1–72, MATRIX 1–36, STEREO AL, STEREO AR, --STEREO BL, STEREO BR SELECTED CH DECAY DYNAMICS 1 THRESHOLD RANGE RATIO FREQUENCY DYNAMICS 2 ATTACK HOLD DECAY RELEASE OUTGAIN BAY L, BAY R, BAY C CH1–288, MIX 1–72, MATRIX 1–36, STEREO AL, STEREO AR, --STEREO BL, STEREO BR SELECTED CH Q BAY L, BAY R, BAY C CH1–288, MIX 1–72, MATRIX 1–36, STEREO AL, STEREO AR, --STEREO BL, STEREO BR SE
User Setup > Functions that can be assigned to the USER DEFINED knobs Function PARAMETER1 PARAMETER2 PARAMETER3 OUTGAIN CH1–288 --- SELECTED CH BAY L, BAY R, BAY C CH1–288 --- SELECTED CH BAY L, BAY R, BAY C CH1–288 --- SELECTED CH BAY L, BAY R, BAY C CH1–288 --- SELECTED CH BAY L, BAY R, BAY C KNEE DYNAMICS 2 TYPE Q DELAY DELAY TIME CH1–288, MIX 1–72, MATRIX 1–36, STEREO AL, STEREO AR, --STEREO BL, STEREO BR SELECTED CH BAND1–4 Q BAND5–8 Q BAND1–4 FREQUENCY EQ BAND5–8 FREQUENCY
User Setup > Functions that can be assigned to the USER DEFINED knobs Function BRIGHTNESS* PARAMETER1 PARAMETER2 --- CH COLOR --- NAME CUE A CUE CUE B COMMON MONITOR A MONITOR MONITOR B SURROUND MONITOR OSCILLATOR --INPUT PFL TRIM --- DCA TRIM --- OUTPUT PFL TRIM --- CUE LEVEL --- INPUT PFL TRIM --- DCA TRIM --- OUTPUT PFL TRIM --- CUE LEVEL --- DIMMER LEVEL --- TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL --- DELAY --- FADER --- DELAY --- FADER --- DIMMER LEVEL --- TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL -
User Setup > Channel Strip section Channel Strip section ■CS-R10、CS-R10-S、CSD-R7 1 2 a 3 Channel strip encoder Adjusts the gain, pan, and the other parameters of the channel. b Channel strip encoder display Indicates the function that has been assigned to the channel strip encoder. c UP/DOWN keys Enable you to select the function that you want to control using the channel strip encoder.
User Setup > Channel Strip section ■CS-R5 1 2 3 4 5 6 900
User Setup > Channel Strip section ■CS-R3 VIEW RANGE RATIO OUTGAIN ATTACK HOLD ATTACK RELEASE RECORDING DECAY THRESHOLD OVERLAY KNEE UNDO USB POWER ASSIGN UPDATE PREVIEW SCENE MEMORY TALKBACK SYSTEM GAIN DEC STORE INC RECALL ON USER DEFINED KEYS GAIN BANK MONITOR / C BANK / D 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12 A GAIN B ENCODER ASSIGN GAIN HOME 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TOUCH AND T
User Setup > Assigning a function to a channel strip encoder Assigning a function to a channel strip encoder 1 Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen. 2 Press the USER DEFINED KNOBS button to access the USER DEFINED KNOBS popup window.
User Setup > Assigning a function to a channel strip encoder 3 Press a button in the CH STRIP ENCODERS field to open the CH STRIP ENCODERS popup window. 4 Use the screen encoder to select the function that you want to assign. You can assign the following functions: • PAN/BALANCE • ANALOG GAIN • DIGITAL GAIN • AUTO A.G./D.G.
User Setup > Assigning a function to a channel strip encoder Press the [ENCODER ASSIGN] key to access the ENCODER ASSIGN popup window and select a function.
User Setup > Using the USER DEFINED keys section (CS-R10, CSD-R7) Using the USER DEFINED keys section (CS-R10, CSD-R7) 1 2 3 a USER DEFINED KEYS BANK [A]/[B]/[C]/[D] keys Switches between USER DEFINED key banks ([A], [B], [C], or [D]). b USER DEFINED KEYS displays Indicate the functions assigned to the USER DEFINED keys. c USER DEFINED KEYS [1]–[12] keys Control the functions as assigned by the user.
User Setup > Using the USER DEFINED keys section (CS-R5, CS-R3) Using the USER DEFINED keys section (CS-R5, CS-R3) 1 2 3 a USER DEFINED KEYS BANK [A]/[B]/[C]/[D] keys Switches between USER DEFINED key banks ([A], [B], [C], or [D]). b USER DEFINED KEYS [1]–[12] keys Control the functions as assigned by the user.
User Setup > Using the USER DEFINED keys section (CS-R5, CS-R3) c USER DEFINED KEYS displays Indicate the functions assigned to the USER DEFINED keys.
User Setup > Using the USER DEFINED keys section (CS-R5, CS-R3) ■CS-R3 VIEW RANGE RATIO OUTGAIN ATTACK HOLD ATTACK RELEASE RECORDING DECAY THRESHOLD OVERLAY KNEE UNDO USB POWER ASSIGN UPDATE PREVIEW SCENE MEMORY TALKBACK SYSTEM GAIN DEC STORE INC RECALL ON USER DEFINED KEYS GAIN BANK 1 MONITOR /C 2 BANK 3 4 1 2 /D 3 A 4 GAIN 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12 B ENCODER ASSIGN GAIN HOME 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
User Setup > Assigning a function to a USER DEFINED key Assigning a function to a USER DEFINED key 1 Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen. 2 Press the USER DEFINED KEYS button. The USER DEFINED KEYS popup window appears. 3 Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign a function. The system displays a popup window, in which you can assign a function to the USER DEFINED key.
User Setup > Modifying the contents displayed for the USER DEFINED keys Modifying the contents displayed for the USER DEFINED keys 1 Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen. 2 Press the USER DEFINED KEYS button. The USER DEFINED KEYS popup window appears. 3 4 Press the LABEL tab. 5 The “USER DEFINED KEY LABEL popup window (CS-R10, CSD-R7)” (p.914) and USER DEFINED KEYS LABEL popup window (CS-R5) will be displayed. 6 Edit the displayed contents as needed.
User Setup > USER DEFINED KEYS popup window USER DEFINED KEYS popup window ■CS-R10、CSD-R7 1 2 3 911
User Setup > USER DEFINED KEYS popup window ■CS-R5 1 2 3 ■CS-R3 1 2 4 This screen contains the following items.
User Setup > USER DEFINED KEYS popup window a BANK tabs Enable you to select the bank ([A], [B], [C], or [D]) for the USER DEFINED knobs.(Bank ([A]/[B]/[C]/[D])/[E]), CS-R3 only) b USER DEFINED KEYS 1–12 Link to USER DEFINED keys [1]–[12] on the panel. Press one of these buttons to access the popup window, in which you can assign a function to the selected button. If nothing is assigned to the button, an indication of “NO ASSIGN” is shown.
User Setup > USER DEFINED KEY LABEL popup window (CS-R10, CSD-R7) USER DEFINED KEY LABEL popup window (CS-R10, CSDR7) 1 2 3 4 This screen contains the following items. a USER DEFINED KEY display Indicate the functions assigned to the USER DEFINED keys. Press the + button to switch to the next candidate, and the − button to switch to the previous candidate. b USER DEFINED key display edit box Use the keyboard to edit the functions (TITLE) and parameters (LINE1–3) assigned to the USER DEFINED keys.
User Setup > USER DEFINED KEY LABEL popup window（CS-R5、CS-R3） USER DEFINED KEY LABEL popup window（CS-R5、CSR3） 1 2 3 4 This screen contains the following items. a USER DEFINED KEY display Indicate the functions assigned to the USER DEFINED keys. Press the + button to switch to the next candidate, and the − button to switch to the previous candidate. b USER DEFINED key display edit box Use the keyboard to edit the functions (TITLE) and parameters (LINE1) assigned to the USER DEFINED keys.
User Setup > Functions that can be assigned to the USER DEFINED keys Functions that can be assigned to the USER DEFINED keys The functions that can be assigned to the USER DEFINED keys are as follows. Function PARAMETER1 PARAMETER2 PARAMETER3 Description NO ASSIGN --- --- --- No assignment LATCH This toggles the ALTERNATE FUNCTION each time it is pressed. UNLATCH This switches to ALTERNATE FUNCTION only while it is pressed.
User Setup > Functions that can be assigned to the USER DEFINED keys Function PARAMETER1 PARAMETER2 PARAMETER3 Description Shuts down the control surface. NOTE CONSOLE SHUTDOWN *1 You can shut down the control surface by pressing and holding the USER DEFINED key assigned in CONSOLE SHUTDOWN. A Switches the CUE A on/ off. B Switches the CUE B on/ off. CUE A Clears the CUE A. CUE B Clears the CUE B. OUTPUT CLEAR CUE CUE A+B SPECIFIC CH CUE Clears the CUE A+B.
User Setup > Functions that can be assigned to the USER DEFINED keys Function PARAMETER1 PARAMETER2 DIRECT RECALL (Event list number) ENABLE (MANUAL) BAY L, BAY R, BAY C, BAY ALL Stores the current fader layer or position for each bay (press the key for at least two seconds). This also returns to the last stored layer or positions (press the key and release it within less than two seconds).
User Setup > Functions that can be assigned to the USER DEFINED keys Function PARAMETER1 METER PEAK HOLD MIDI[CS] *1 PARAMETER2 PARAMETER3 Description Turns the meter peak hold on/off. PROGRAM CHANGE PGM 1–128 Transmits a program change message of the corresponding number to an external device. CONTROL CHANGE CC 1–31, 33–95, 102–119 Transmits a control change of the corresponding number to an external device.
User Setup > Functions that can be assigned to the USER DEFINED keys Function PARAMETER1 PARAMETER2 SURROUND MONITOR Description Turns the surround monitor output on/off. OUTPUT MONITOR PARAMETER3 SURROUND A, SURROUND B, Turns the surround DOWNMIX A,DOWNMIX monitor source on or B, EXT 5.1-1–4, EXT off. ST-1–4 SOURCE DIMMER ON Turns the Dimmer function on/off. MASTER 1–12 ON Switches the MUTE GROUP MASTER on/off. ALL MUTE ON Switches all MUTE GROUP MASTERs on/off at the same time.
User Setup > Functions that can be assigned to the USER DEFINED keys Function PARAMETER1 PARAMETER2 PARAMETER3 Description BAY L, BAY R, BAY C Stores the current screen/window displayed for each bay (press the key for at least two seconds). This also returns to the last stored screen/ window (press the key and release it within less than two seconds). BOOKMARK with “SEL” BAY L, BAY R, BAY C Stores the current screen/window displayed for each bay (press the key for at least two seconds).
User Setup > Functions that can be assigned to the USER DEFINED keys Function PARAMETER1 PARAMETER2 PARAMETER3 NO ASSIGN RECORDER *1 SCENE DIRECT PLAY The specified audio file is played back from the beginning. Audio files to be played are saved in the SONGS subfolder inside the YPE folder. (TITLE) INC RECALL Recalls the nextnumbered scene. DEC RECALL Recalls the previousnumbered scene.
User Setup > Functions that can be assigned to the USER DEFINED keys Function SET BY SEL *1 PARAMETER1 PARAMETER2 SET [GAIN COMPENSATION ON] BAY ALL PARAMETER3 BAY C *3 Pressing the SELECTED CH knob while holding down this key will revert to the default value. SET DEFAULT VALUE *1 BAY ALL SET NOMINAL VALUE *1 Pressing the [SEL] key while holding down this key will set the fader of the channel to nominal level.
User Setup > Functions that can be assigned to the USER DEFINED keys Function PARAMETER1 PARAMETER2 PANNING Rs CH1–288 PANNING BACK PANNING SIDE L SURROUND PAN PANNING SIDE R PANNING CENTER PANNING TOGGLE SELECTED CH PARAMETER3 BAY L, BAY R, BAY C CH1–288 SELECTED CH BAY L, BAY R, BAY C CH1–288 SELECTED CH BAY L, BAY R, BAY C CH1–288 SELECTED CH BAY L, BAY R, BAY C SELECTED CH BAY L, BAY R, BAY C CH1–288 LATCH CURRENT GROUP, GROUP 1–8CURRENT GROUP, GROUP 1–8 Switches the Talkback on/off.
User Setup > Using the Alternate function Using the Alternate function If you assign the Alternate function (ALTERNATE FUNCTION) to a USER DEFINED key, turning that key on will toggle between parameter settings that are controlled via channel strip encoders (such as between ANALOG GAIN and DIGITAL GAIN). For the combination with the [CUE] key, this can be used as a substitute for the ALTERNATE CUE [Fn] key.
MIDI/GPI > About MIDI MIDI/GPI About MIDI The RIVAGE PM series can use MIDI to perform the following operations. ■ Program Change transmission and reception When you recall a specific scene on the RIVAGE PM series, a Program Change message of the corresponding number can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, the corresponding scene can be recalled when the corresponding Program Change message is received from an external device.
MIDI/GPI > Basic MIDI Settings Basic MIDI Settings You can select the type of MIDI messages the RIVAGE PM series will transmit and receive. You can also select the MIDI port that will be used. 1 Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen. 2 Press the MIDI/GPI [CS] button to open the MIDI/GPI [CS] popup window. NOTE If using the DSP engine, press the MIDI/GPI [DSP] button to access the MIDI/GPI [DSP] popup window. The subsequent explanation is for when using the control surface.
MIDI/GPI > Basic MIDI Settings 5 Select a channel. To select an item, use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. Press the OK button to confirm the selected channel and close the MIDI SETUP popup window. NOTE Alternatively, you can select the desired channel by pressing the channel entry in the field or by turning the corresponding screen encoder. 6 Turn transmission/reception on or off for each MIDI message. NOTE ( ( For details on using Program Changes, refer to ““Using Program Changes to recall scenes” (p.
MIDI/GPI > MIDI/GPI window (MIDI SETUP page) MIDI/GPI window (MIDI SETUP page) 1 3 2 4 5 This screen contains the following items. a PORT/CH field Enables you to specify the settings for the channel that transmit/receive MIDI messages. • Tx CH.............................Press this button to access a popup window, in which you can select a MIDI channel that will transmit MIDI messages. • Rx CH.............................
MIDI/GPI > MIDI/GPI window (MIDI SETUP page) c PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field Enables you to select the Program Change transmit/receive mode. • SINGLE .........................If this button is on, Program Changes will be transmitted and received on a single MIDI channel (Single mode). • MULTI.............................If this button is on, Program Changes will be transmitted/received on multiple MIDI channels (Multi mode). • OMNI ..............................
MIDI/GPI > MIDI SETUP popup window MIDI SETUP popup window Operations in this window are the same for both transmission (Tx) and reception (Rx). This window includes the following items. 1 This screen contains the following items. a CH field Enables you to select the channel from CH1–CH16 that will transmit or receive MIDI messages.
MIDI/GPI > Using Program Changes to recall scenes Using Program Changes to recall scenes The RIVAGE PM series enables you assign a specific scene to be recalled to each Program Change number, so that when a scene is recalled on the RIVAGE PM series, a Program Change message of the corresponding number will be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, the corresponding scene can be recalled when a Program Change message is received from an external device.
MIDI/GPI > Using Program Changes to recall scenes 4 Use the buttons in the PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field to select the Program Change transmission/reception mode. You can select one of the following two Program Change transmission/reception modes. ・ Multi mode (when the MULTI button is on): Program changes of all MIDI channels will be transmitted and received. (The transmit/receive channel specified in the MIDI page will be ignored.
MIDI/GPI > Using Program Changes to recall scenes 6 To assign a scene to each program number, press the desired cell in the PROGRAM CHANGE ASSIGNMENT column on the list. The “MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE popup window” (p.936) appears. In this window, you can specify the scene (to be recalled) that you want to assign to each program number. 7 Select SCENE in the TYPE field, and then use the LIST/DIRECT field to select a desired scene number for recall operations. To select an item, use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
MIDI/GPI > MIDI/GPI window (PROGRAM CHANGE page) MIDI/GPI window (PROGRAM CHANGE page) This screen contains the following items. a PROGRAM CHANGE field Switches Program Change transmission and reception on or off. This setting is linked with the PROGRAM CHANGE field of the MIDI page. • Tx.....................................Turn this button on to transmit the corresponding Program Change message when a scene is recalled. • Rx.....................................
MIDI/GPI > MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE popup window MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE popup window 1 2 This popup window includes the following items. a 3 TYPE field Enables you to select the type of event. The following table lists the events you can select. b DESTINATION field This field will be supported in the future versions. If SCENE is selected, this will indicate - - -. You do not need to select any item for this field. c LIST/DIRECT field Enables you to select the scene you want to recall. • LIST................
MIDI/GPI > MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE popup window 937
MIDI/GPI > Using Control Changes to control parameters Using Control Changes to control parameters You can use MIDI Control Change messages to control specified fader/knob operations, [ON] key on/off operations, etc. on the RIVAGE PM series. This capability can be used to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, and play back the data later. Using Control Changes This method uses typical Control Changes (control numbers 1–31, 33–95, 102–119).
MIDI/GPI > Using Control Changes to control parameters NOTE ( ( 6 You can also press the desired parameter in the field to select it. You can press a field to highlight the item you want to select, and then turn one of the screen encoders to select a parameter. Assign parameters to other control numbers in the same way. When you operate a specified parameter on the RIVAGE PM series with these settings, the corresponding Control Change message will be transmitted to external devices.
MIDI/GPI > MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE popup window MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE popup window 1 The screen contains the following items. a 2 MODE field Enables you to select an operation target that will be controlled via a Control Change message, from input channels, output channels, DCAs, and Mute Master. b PARAMETER 1/2/3 fields In conjunction with the MODE field, this field specifies the type of operation parameter.
MIDI/GPI > MIDI/GPI window (CONTROL CHANGE page) MIDI/GPI window (CONTROL CHANGE page) 1 2 4 3 The screen contains the following items. a CONTROL CHANGE field Enables you to switch Control Change transmission/reception on or off, and specify whether Control Changes will be echoed out. This setting is linked with the CONTROL CHANGE field on the MIDI page. b List Shows the fader/knob operation or [ON] key on/off operation that are assigned to each control number. • NO. ................................
MIDI/GPI > About GPI About GPI The GPI connector located on the rear panel can be used as a GPI (General Purpose Interface) input/output connector. This connector provides eight GPI IN ports and eight GPI OUT ports. For example you can use an external switch to control internal parameters of the RIVAGE PM series or to switch scenes. Conversely, operations or scene changes performed on the RIVAGE PM series can send control signals to an external device.
MIDI/GPI > About GPI Lighting external LED indicators via GPI OUT1 CS/DSP +5V +5V c 10Ω CPU GPO1 75mA max CAUTION ( Be careful not to exceed a current of 75 mA at the OUT ports. Lighting a lamp (100V AC) by switching the relay on an external device via GPI OUT1 CS/DSP +5V +5V d 100V AC + 10Ω CPU GPO1 – 75mA max CAUTION ( Be careful not to exceed a current of 75 mA at the OUT ports.
MIDI/GPI > Using GPI IN Using GPI IN You can use the GPI IN ports of the GPI connector to control the parameters of the RIVAGE PM series from an external device. For example, you could use an external switch to turn the RIVAGE PM series’s Talkback on/ off, operate the Tap Tempo function, or switch scenes. 1 Connect an external device to the GPI connector of the control surface. NOTE If using the DSP engine, connect the DSP engine with the external devices.
MIDI/GPI > Using GPI IN 5 Specify the input type and POLARITY MODE based on the specifications of the external device you are using. 6 To assign the function or parameter that you want to control, press the GPI SETUP popup button to open the GPI SETUP popup window. NOTE Available options in the GPI SETUP popup window are the same as for the USER DEFINED keys.
MIDI/GPI > GPI page GPI page 2 4 3 1 The screen contains the following items. a GPI IN status indicator Indicates the status of the voltage being input to the GPI IN port. b Switch property select buttons Pressing each button repeatedly will toggle between LATCH and UNLATCH indicators. ..........In general, select this mode if you connect an alternate switch (that toggles between on and off if you press the switch repeatedly). ..........
MIDI/GPI > Using GPI OUT Using GPI OUT The GPI OUT ports of the GPI OUT connector enable you to control an external device by performing operations on the RIVAGE PM series. 1 Connect an external device to the GPI connector of the control surface. NOTE If using the DSP engine, connect the DSP engine with the external devices. The subsequent explanation is for when using the control surface. 2 3 Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen.
MIDI/GPI > Using GPI OUT 6 To assign the function or parameter that you want to control, press the GPI OUT SETUP popup button. Configurable “GPI OUT functions” (p.954) 7 8 9 In each field, select the desired function or parameter. When you finish making settings, press the OK button. Repeat steps 5 through 8 to specify functions and parameters for other ports.
MIDI/GPI > GPI page GPI page 3 4 2 1 The screen contains the following items. a GPI OUT status indicator Indicates the status of the voltage that is being output from each GPI OUT port. b POLARITY MODE select button Enables you to select the polarity of the GPI OUT port. ...............(Low active) Grounded when the GPI OUT port is active. ...............(High active) Open when the GPI OUT port is active. c GPI SETUP popup button Press this button to access the GPI SETUP popup window.
MIDI/GPI > Using FADER START Using FADER START Make FADER START settings if you want a device connected to a GPI OUT port to operate in tandem with fader operations. 1 Connect an external device to the GPI connector of the control surface or the DSP engine. NOTE If using the DSP engine, connect the DSP engine with the external devices. The subsequent explanation is for when using the control surface. 2 3 Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen.
MIDI/GPI > FADER START page FADER START page 1 2 8 4 5 6 7 The screen contains the following items. 3 ■ OUTPUT DESTINATION field a GPI OUT1 – GPI OUT8 buttons Select the GPI OUT port for which you want to make settings. b Fader indicator Indicates the selected fader. Use the [SEL] keys on the panel to select a fader. ■ THRESHOLD field c UPSTROKE/DOWNSTROKE knobs These knobs specify the level that will be the threshold at which to output a trigger signal.
MIDI/GPI > FADER START page d NO ASSIGN Operating the fader of the selected channel will not cause a signal to be output. e FADER START A trigger signal of 250 msec duration will be output if the fader of the selected channel is raised from below the specified UPSTROKE level (between −138.0 dB and 10.0 dB) to beyond that level. f FADER STOP A trigger signal of 250 msec duration will be output when the fader of the selected channel reaches the specified DOWNSTROKE level (between −∞ dB and 9.95 dB).
MIDI/GPI > Time code Time code The TC IN connector located on the rear panel of the DSP engine or the CSD-R7 is an input connector for receiving time code signals from an external device. A scene or library item registered in the event list function can be recalled when time code received via the TC IN connector reaches a specified time.
MIDI/GPI > GPI OUT functions GPI OUT functions You can assign the following functions. Function PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Description NO ASSIGN --- --- No assignment A Turns on the [CUE] key of the selected channel for CUE A/ CUE B. CUE ON DCA ONLY CUE ACTIVE B A B A INPUT ONLY B A OUTPUT ONLY DSP MIRRORING *1 GPI IN ACTIVE IND. B Turns on the [CUE] key of the DCA for CUE A/CUE B. Turns on the [CUE] key of the input channel for CUE A/CUE B.
Maintenance > Firmware version Maintenance Firmware version You can view a list of the current firmware version number of each component. NOTE ( ( If there is a combination of firmware that is wrong for the operation of the overall system, the applicable component is displayed in yellow. In this case, refer to the appropriate update guide, and perform the update.
Maintenance > Firmware updates Firmware updates You can update the unit firmware to improve operations, add functions, and correct possible malfunctions. Details on updating the firmware are available on the following Yamaha Pro Audio website: http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ For information on updating and setting up the unit, please refer to the firmware update guide available on the website.
Maintenance > Adjusting the faders Adjusting the faders Depending on the environment in which you use the system, discrepancies may occur in the motion of the motorized faders. You can use the Calibration function to correct these discrepancies. The RIVAGE PM series features two types of fader calibration. Motor Drive Calibration Automatically optimizes the motorized fader movement.
Maintenance > Adjusting the faders 4 Select the tab for the desired fader calibration operation. If the MOTOR DRIVE calibration tab is selected: For the specified faders in the Channel Strip section and Master section, the motorized fader movement will be automatically calibrated. 5 Press the [SEL] key for each fader that you want to calibrate. Faders for which a problem was detected in the fader settings at start-up will already be selected. 6 Press the START button.
Maintenance > Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen panels (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen panels (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) Follow the steps below to correctly align the positions of the LCD display and the touch screen panels. 1 2 Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen. Press the MAINTENANCE button to access the MAINTENANCE popup window.
Maintenance > Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen panels (CS-R10, CS-R10-S, CSD-R7) NOTE To set the detection points accurately, press the cross-shaped cursor from the position and posture in which you normally operate the unit. 6 Press the FINISH button. The calibration values will be saved in internal memory.
Maintenance > Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen panels (CS-R5， CS-R3) Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen panels (CS-R5， CS-R3) Follow the steps below to correctly align the positions of the LCD display and the touch screen panels. 1 2 Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen. Press the MAINTENANCE button to access the MAINTENANCE popup window.
Maintenance > Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen panels (CS-R5， CS-R3) NOTE To set the detection points accurately, press the cross-shaped cursor from the position and posture in which you normally operate the unit. 6 The calibration values will be saved in internal memory.
Maintenance > Initializing the unit to factory default settings Initializing the unit to factory default settings If an error occurs in the unit’s internal memory, or if you forget the password and cannot operate the unit, you can use the following procedure to initialize the internal memory. ( When you initialize the internal memory, all content that had been saved in memory will be lost. Use caution when performing the following steps.
Maintenance > INITIALIZATION page INITIALIZATION page 1 2 3 This screen contains the following items. a SYSTEM LOG button Press this button to initialize the system log. b LIBRARY button Press this button to initialize the libraries. c SCENE button Press this button to initialize the scene memory. d OTHER button Press this button to initialize settings such as the current data or setup data.
Maintenance > Adjusting the input/output gain Adjusting the input/output gain If necessary, you can make fine adjustments to the input and output gain. 1 Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen. 2 Press the MAINTENANCE button to access the MAINTENANCE popup window. This window includes several pages, which you can switch between using the tabs located at the top of the window. 3 Press the PORT TRIM tab. The view switches to the “PORT TRIM page” (p.966).
Maintenance > PORT TRIM page PORT TRIM page 1 2 3 This screen contains the following items. a Component select buttons Enables you to select a component. b Port select buttons Enables you to select a port. c PORT TRIM knobs Adjust the gain. • INPUT PORT (Fine adjustment of the analog input gain) This makes fine adjustments in 0.1 dB steps to the gain of the specified analog input port. • OUTPUT PORT (Fine adjustment of the output ports) This makes fine adjustments in 0.
Maintenance > System log System log The system log enables you to identify and read about problems that occurred during operation of the RIVAGE PM series, and related information. You can also store system log data to a USB flash drive as text data. System log data is useful for analysis and troubleshooting of problems and malfunctions. NOTE You can store up to about 800 items of log data in the internal memory, including up to about 400 items related to the control surface, plus another 400 items.
Maintenance > System log rivage_systemlog_dvlp.log rivage_systemlog_panl.txt Support service file * Date and time will be added to all file names. An example of the system log file: “rivage_systemlog_YYYYMMDDhhmmss_user.txt” NOTE If you want to store the files using RIVAGE PM Editor, they will be stored in the storage location specified on the SAVE/LOAD screen. If the specified storage location is not valid, the EXPORT LOGS TO STORAGE button will be disabled.
Maintenance > SYSTEM LOG page SYSTEM LOG page 1 2 This screen contains the following items. a 3 MESSAGE TYPE buttons Enable you to select message types to display or hide on the SYSTEM LOG page. The following message types are included. b Scroll knob You can scroll the list using the screen encoder.
Maintenance > System dump (CS-R10, CS-R10, CSD-R7) System dump (CS-R10, CS-R10, CSD-R7) If the RIVAGE PM series experiences a software problem during operation, it will dump (store) the system status at that point in the internal memory of the control surface. If the problem is related to software, an error message (something like the one below) will appear. ( If you see this error message, restart the control surface as soon as possible. Press the OK button.
Maintenance > DSP-RX INFORMATION DSP-RX INFORMATION You can upgrade the DSP-RX to a DSP-RX-EX by installing an optional DEK-DSP-RX (a DSP expansion kit) installed and following the related processes. Please consult your Yamaha dealer for more information on the installation and related processes.
Console Status > Setting the date and time of the internal clock Console Status Setting the date and time of the internal clock This section explains how to set the date and time of the clock built into the CL unit, and how to select a date and time display format. The date and time you specify here will affect the time stamp used when saving or loading a scene. When connected to RIVAGE PM Editor, the internal clock automatically synchronizes to the computer’s time.
Console Status > Setting the date and time of the internal clock 5 When you finish making settings, press the OK button. The date, time, and display format you specified will be finalized, and the popup window will close. If you press the CANCEL button or the “x” symbol instead of the OK button, your changes will be discarded and the popup window will close.
Console Status > DATE/TIME popup window DATE/TIME popup window 1 This screen contains the following items. a 2 3 DATE Specifies the date of the internal clock. b TIME Specifies the time of the internal clock. c FORMAT field (display format) This field specifies the format in which the date and time of the internal clock are displayed.
Panel Settings > Specifying the brightness of the touch screens, LEDs, channel name displays, and lamps Panel Settings Specifying the brightness of the touch screens, LEDs, channel name displays, and lamps This section explains how to specify the brightness and contrast of individual touch screens, top panel LEDs and channel name displays, and lamps connected to the rear panel LAMP connectors of the control surface. You can save four different settings in banks A–D, and select one of them.
Panel Settings > Specifying the brightness of the touch screens, LEDs, channel name displays, and lamps 3 Use the screen encoders to set the following parameters. • BANK A–D..................Enable you to select the target bank (A–D). CONTRAST field • NAME............................Adjusts the contrast of the characters in the channel name display on the top panel. BRIGHTNESS field • NAME............................Adjusts the brightness of the channel name displays on the top panel.
Panel Settings > Console Lock Console Lock You can temporarily prohibit console operations in order to prevent unwanted operation. This setting completely disables operations of the panel and touch screen, so that controllers cannot be operated by an accidental touch or by an unauthorized third party while the operator is taking a break. NOTE ( ( If you forget the password and cannot defeat Console Lock, press the [RESET] switch on the rear panel.
Panel Settings > Console Lock 3 After entering the password in the PASSWORD field, enter the same password in the RE-ENTER PASSWORD field for verification, and finally press the OK button.. The CONSOLE LOCK screen will appear, the Console Lock function will be enabled, and all controllers (excluding the MONITOR A/B knobs, TALKBACK LEVEL knob, PHONES A/B LEVEL knobs, and brightness control knob) will become inoperable.
Panel Settings > PASSWORD popup window PASSWORD popup window 1 2 3 This screen contains the following items. a PASSWORD field b RE-ENTER PASSWORD field Enter the password once again. c REMEMBER THIS PASSWORD button If this button is on, you will need to use the same password next time.
Panel Settings > Unlocking the console Unlocking the console 1 Press the CONSOLE LOCK screen. If no password has been set, Console Lock will be defeated. If a password has been set, the PASSWORD popup window will appear, enabling you to enter the password. 2 Enter the password and press the OK button. The console will be unlocked, the system will display the SETUP screen, and the controllers will be operable once again.
Panel Settings > Specifying the CONSOLE LOCK screen image Specifying the CONSOLE LOCK screen image You can display an image file on the CONSOLE LOCK screen. In the SAVE/LOAD popup window, specify the image file that you want to display, and then load it from the USB flash drive. For a procedure on loading a file from a USB flash drive, refer to ““Loading a file from a USB flash drive” (p.845).” NOTE Only BMP, JPEG, or PNG image files can be loaded.
Setting up RIVAGE PM Editor and RIVAGE PM StageMix > About RIVAGE PM Editor Setting up RIVAGE PM Editor and RIVAGE PM StageMix About RIVAGE PM Editor RIVAGE PM Editor (called “PM Editor” in this book) is application software that enables you to use your computer to perform off-line editing by preparing the RIVAGE PM series settings in advance, and also to monitor and operate the RIVAGE PM series (on-line monitoring/operation).
Setting up RIVAGE PM Editor and RIVAGE PM StageMix > On-line monitoring/operation On-line monitoring/operation 1 Connect a computer (that has PM Editor installed) to the DSP engine (or to the control surface) using an Ethernet cable. For more information on configuring the network, please refer to the “RIVAGE PM Editor Installation Guide.” NOTE Up to two instances of PM Editor can be connected.
Setting up RIVAGE PM Editor and RIVAGE PM StageMix > On-line monitoring/operation 2 Start PM Editor. The following screen appears at start-up. NOTE ( ( Although the screen (that is displayed in response to differently-configured panel elements, such as User Defined Keys) varies depending on the MIXER TYPE setting, the same data will be processed. In addition, on-line connection to PM Editor will be unaffected.
Setting up RIVAGE PM Editor and RIVAGE PM StageMix > On-line monitoring/operation 3 In SELECT MIXER TYPE, select the RIVAGE PM Series unit; and in NETWORK INTERFACE, select the network that you will use. If an IP address that can be connected to the selected network is specified, the Connect button can be pressed. 4 Click the Connect button so that the RIVAGE PM series will be linked to PM Editor.
Setting up RIVAGE PM Editor and RIVAGE PM StageMix > On-line monitoring/operation 7 Edit the mixing data.
Setting up RIVAGE PM Editor and RIVAGE PM StageMix > PM Editor startup screen PM Editor startup screen a NUMBER OF WINDOWS Select the number of screens to display (1–3). The screens correspond to each bay as shown below. - 1st screen: BAY R - 2nd screen: BAY C - 3rd screen: BAY L The following operations will always make the main screen (BAY R) the target.
Setting up RIVAGE PM Editor and RIVAGE PM StageMix > Off-line editing Off-line editing 1 Start PM Editor. The following screen appears at start-up. 2 3 Press the Use Offline button. Edit the mixing data.
Setting up RIVAGE PM Editor and RIVAGE PM StageMix > Off-line editing 4 5 When you finish editing the data, save the setting file using the SAVE/LOAD screen. Exit the application.
Setting up RIVAGE PM Editor and RIVAGE PM StageMix > Synchronizing the edited mixing data Synchronizing the edited mixing data 1 Start PM Editor. The following screen appears at start-up.
Setting up RIVAGE PM Editor and RIVAGE PM StageMix > Synchronizing the edited mixing data 2 In SELECT MIXER TYPE, select the RIVAGE PM series unit; in NETWORK INTERFACE, select the network that you will use. If an IP address that can be connected to the selected network is specified, the Connect button can be pressed. 3 Click the Connect button. Once the DSP engine detects PM Editor on-line, the DEVICE SYNC screen appears. 4 5 Select “EDITOR → DSP.” Press the SYNC button.
Setting up RIVAGE PM Editor and RIVAGE PM StageMix > RIVAGE PM Editor On-screen operation RIVAGE PM Editor On-screen operation Using the mouse wheel You can use the mouse wheel as if you were operating the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob on the unit. Using the PC keyboard You can use the PC keyboard to enter text as if you were operating the keyboard screen on the unit. Menu bar ■ File menu This is a menu for file operations. Exit Exits PM Editor. ■ View menu Selects a screen to view.
Setting up RIVAGE PM Editor and RIVAGE PM StageMix > RIVAGE PM Editor On-screen operation CONTROLS: Displays the screen for the panel operation of the control surface. ■ Help menu Help: Opens a Web browser to display the manual library. About RIVAGE PM Editor: Opens the “About RIVAGE PM Editor” screen, which displays the version number of PM Editor. NOTE You must connect to the Internet to view the manual library.
Setting up RIVAGE PM Editor and RIVAGE PM StageMix > About RIVAGE PM Editor screens About RIVAGE PM Editor screens PM Editor screens are identical to those on the control surface. However, parts that you cannot control in PM Editor are hidden, as shown below. Press the [F2] key repeatedly to toggle between the OVERVIEW screen and the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
Setting up RIVAGE PM Editor and RIVAGE PM StageMix > About RIVAGE PM Editor screens CONTROLS You can perform panel operation of the control surface from PM Editor. Press the CONTROLS (F7) button to access the respective SETUP screen. NOTE If you have selected Full Screen (F11) from the Zoom menu, each CONTROLS screen will be displayed in the meter section. Switching CONTROLS screens Use the left and right arrow buttons in the upper-left corner to select the desired CONTROLS screen.
Setting up RIVAGE PM Editor and RIVAGE PM StageMix > Operating the faders in the METER screen (Full Screen) (RIVAGE PM Editor) Operating the faders in the METER screen (Full Screen) (RIVAGE PM Editor) PM Editor enables you to control the faders or channel on/off using the mouse in the METER screen (Full Screen). The fader indicators will appear thicker at the nominal and bottom positions.
Setting up RIVAGE PM Editor and RIVAGE PM StageMix > Saving and loading a file (RIVAGE PM Editor) Saving and loading a file (RIVAGE PM Editor) In PM Editor, you can specify a directory to/from which to save or load a file. The file format that PM Editor supports is expressed with the extension .RIVAGEPM. Internal setting files of the RIVAGE PM series will be saved. NOTE ( ( You can save .
Setting up RIVAGE PM Editor and RIVAGE PM StageMix > Initializing PM Editor Initializing PM Editor 1 Press [SETUP] -> [MAINTENANCE] -> [INITIALIZATION] tabs to access the INITIALIZATION page. 2 You can select multiple items to be initialized as required by the desired initialization method. 3 Press the INITIALIZE THIS CONSOLE button. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Initialization operation. 4 Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box. The Initialization operation starts.
Setting up RIVAGE PM Editor and RIVAGE PM StageMix > About RIVAGE PM StageMix About RIVAGE PM StageMix RIVAGE PM StageMix (subsequently called PM StageMix) is software for remotely operating this unit from an iPad that is connected via Wi-Fi. This allows you to mix remotely while hearing the sound in a listening position such as the audience seating or in front of the monitor speakers. Up to two instances can be connected to one control surface unit.
Setting up RIVAGE PM Editor and RIVAGE PM StageMix > Network settings for the control surface Network settings for the control surface 1 Press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2 Press the NETWORK popup button. The NETWORK popup window appears. 3 4 5 Press the FOR MIXER CONTROL tab to access the IP SETTING screen. Turn the ENABLE button on. Specify the IP address and subnet mask. Unusable values are shown in red.
Setting up RIVAGE PM Editor and RIVAGE PM StageMix > Network settings for the control surface 6 Press the MISC tab to access the COMMUNICATION QUALITY screen. 7 Specify the COMMUNICATION QUALITY setting for the NETWORK connector to which PM StageMix will be connected. If you are using this in conjunction with PM Editor on the same NETWORK connector, select the EDITOR/STAGEMIX button. If you are using only StageMix, selecting the STAGEMIX ONLY button will lower the communication load.
Setting up RIVAGE PM Editor and RIVAGE PM StageMix > Network settings on the iPad Network settings on the iPad 1 2 3 On the iPad, tap Settings > Wi-Fi to access the Wi-Fi network screen. Turn Wi-Fi “on.” In the displayed list of networks, tap the network to which the RIVAGE PM series is connected. If a password is required, enter it before connecting.
Messages > Messages Messages Messages The following message types might appear on the RIVAGE PM series. Message Meaning [xx] connected Device xx is connected. [xx] disconnected! Device xx is disconnected. [‘LOCATION’ ] : Multiple Word Clock Masters found! Please check the connection status of each DSP Engine, the Engine ID via the LCD Display of each DSP Engine and the Word Clock Setup view. [ Location ]: Multiple word clock masters were found.
Messages > Messages Message Meaning Cannot recall! (Internal error) The scene cannot be recalled due to an internal error. Cannot save now! (mixing data corrupt) Control surface data is corrupt and cannot be saved. To recover the data, access the DEVICE SYNC screen, and then re-sync data in the DSP -> CS sync direction. Alternatively, access the SAVE/LOAD screen and load the control surface setting file. Otherwise, initialize the control surface. Cannot Select for GLOBAL PASTE! (too many scenes; max.
Messages > Messages Message Meaning Couldn’t write file! The system tried to save the file, but failed to write it to the USB storage device. CUE turned off (Keyin) The Keyin’s CUE was automatically turned off. CUE turned off (Plug-in) The plug-in’s CUE was automatically turned off. CUE turned off (USB playback out) The CUE of the USB recorder output was automatically turned off. CUE turned off (USB recorder in) The CUE of the USB recorder input was automatically turned off.
Messages > Messages Message Meaning Editor initialization [XX] completed The Editor initialization is complete. Error occurred at Secondary Port. When using redundant settings, the network cable of the secondary port was disconnected. Fader bank snapshot is done. Fader bank snapshot has been taken. File access busy! The system did not complete the operation because it is currently processing internal data. Try it again later.
Messages > Messages Message Meaning Low Battery! (DSP Engine) The internal battery capacity of the DSP engine is low. The internal clock may not keep the correct time. Please contact your Yamaha dealer for information regarding battery replacement. Max. HY slot channel count exceeded! (256) The number of output channels in the DSP engine assigned to TWINLANe exceeds the maximum number (256) of channels allowed. Limit the number to 256 or less. Max.
Messages > Messages Message Meaning Only one DCA can be rolled out at one time. You cannot roll-out DCA members on multiple bays simultaneously. Operating as the word clock master. This unit is the clock master. Overlay turned off. Overlay has been turned off. Overlay turned on. Overlay has been turned on. Page bookmarked The page is bookmarked. Power loss to PSU detected (CS X) One of the two power supply units failed to supply power.
Messages > Messages Message Meaning This feature will be supported in a future software release. This feature will be supported in a future software update. This item is read only! You cannot modify this item. This message appears if you attempt to change a Factory preset title. Too many Monitor Sources! Max. 8 sources can be assigned. Too many sources have been selected for monitor input. (Up to eight sources can be assigned.
Messages > Messages Message Meaning USB recorder: Recording stopped due to wrong word clock! Recording on the USB recorder was stopped due to an inappropriate system word clock. USB recorder: Storage full! There is insufficient capacity in the USB storage device. USB recorder: Storage mounted The USB storage device is mounted. USB recorder: Storage protected! The USB storage device is protected.
Messages > DSP Messages DSP Messages An error message for caution or attention will be displayed on the front panel LCD, and will be indicated via the color indicator. Error messages indicating caution Repair might be required. Contact your Yamaha dealer. LCD Message Color Indicator Status Description *[ERR M0#] H/W ERROR MY SLOT# Red (flashing) A card inserted in the MY card slot is not accessible. A number sign (#) indicates the slot number in relation with the corresponding error.
Messages > DSP Messages • Make sure that the cable is securely inserted. *[ERR T12] TWINLANe T V B OP IP Yellow (lit steadily) An error has occurred with the optical transceiver module on the HY256-TL/ HY256-TL-SMF. • Use a commerciallyavailable cleaning tool for fiber optics to clean both ends of the cable and the connectors on the card. • Change to a different cable.
Messages > DSP Messages *[ERR P02] POWER B OFF *[ERR C11] LOW BATT *[ERR C12] NO BATT Make sure that the power switch on power supply unit B is turned on, and that the power cord is connected to the unit and power supply unit B. Yellow (lit steadily) Power is not supplied from power supply unit B. Yellow (lit steadily) Please contact your Yamaha dealer immediately and have The backup battery voltage is qualified Yamaha service down to 2.8V or lower. personnel replace the backup battery.
Yamaha Pro Audio global website http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ Yamaha Downloads https://download.yamaha.
